Manage Breakpoints

HARMEAN function diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp index 16a579e51d..677ad095fd 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060185.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -507,8 +507,8 @@ oldref="175">WEIBULL Returns the values of the Weibull distribution. The Weibull distribution is a continuous probability distribution, with parameters Alpha > 0 (shape) and Beta > 0 (scale). - If C is 1, WEIBULL calculates the probability density function. - If C is 0, WEIBULL calculates the cumulative distribution function. + If C is 0, WEIBULL calculates the probability density function. + If C is 1, WEIBULL calculates the cumulative distribution function. Syntax WEIBULL(Number; Alpha; Beta; C) @@ -518,8 +518,8 @@ Alpha is the shape parameter of the Weibull distribution. Beta is the scale parameter of the Weibull distribution. - - C indicates the type of function. If C equals 0 the form of the function is calculated, if C equals 1 the distribution is calculated. + + C indicates the type of function. Example diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp index 2e67ff433e..5d6cb0eb3d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cell_protect.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ hiding;formulas formulas;hiding MW transferred "modifying;..." and "changing;..." into one index entry -Protecting Cells from Changes +Protecting Cells from Changes In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can protect sheets and the document as a whole. You can choose whether the cells are protected against accidental changes, whether the formulas can be viewed from within Calc, whether the cells are visible or whether the cells can be printed. Protection can be provided by means of a password, but it does not have to be. If you have assigned a password, protection can only be removed once the correct password has been entered. @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ To protect the structure of the document, for example the count, names, and order of the sheets, from being changed, choose Tools - Protect Document - Document. - (Optional) Enter a password of at least 5 characters. + (Optional) Enter a password. If you forget your password, you cannot deactivate the protection. If you only want to protect cells from accidental changes, set the sheet protection, but do not enter a password. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp index 821d21dc6f..66c15ec5be 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/datapilot_edittable.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -53,7 +53,6 @@ To remove a button from the table, just drag it out of the DataPilot table. Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer positioned within the sheet has become a 'not allowed' icon. The button is deleted. To edit the DataPilot table, click a cell inside the DataPilot table and open the context menu. In the context menu you find the command Start, which displays the DataPilot dialog for the current DataPilot table. In the DataPilot table, you can use drag-and-drop or cut/paste commands to rearrange the order of data fields. - By double-clicking on some buttons inside the DataPilot table you can hide the subelements below it.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp index 3f34af06f0..d6cddc9d6a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Selecting Multiple Cells -/text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Selecting Multiple Cells + /text/scalc/guide/mark_cells.xhp + + + cells; selecting -marking cells -selecting;cells -multiple cells selection -selection modes in spreadsheets -tables; selecting ranges + marking cells + selecting;cells + multiple cells selection + selection modes in spreadsheets + tables; selecting ranges mw changed "selection modes..." -Selecting Multiple Cells +Selecting Multiple Cells -Select a rectangular range -With the mouse button pressed, drag from one corner to the diagonally opposed corner of the range. -Mark a single cell -Do one of the following: - - -Click, then Shift-click the cell. - - -Pressing the mouse button, drag a range across two cells, do not release the mouse button, and then drag back to the first cell. You can now move the individual cell by drag and drop. - - -Select various dispersed cells -Mark at least one cell. Then while pressing CommandCtrl, click each of the additional cells. -Switch marking mode -On the status bar, click the box with the legend STD / EXT / ADD to switch the marking mode: - - - -Field contents - - -Effect of clicking the mouse - - - - -STD - - -A mouse click selects the cell you have clicked on. Unmarks all marked cells. - - - - -EXT - - -A mouse click marks a rectangular range from the current cell to the cell you clicked. - - - - -ADD - - -A mouse click in a cell adds it to the already marked cells. A mouse click in a marked cell unmarks it. Alternatively, CommandCtrl-click the cells. - - -

+ Select a rectangular range + With the mouse button pressed, drag from one corner to the diagonally opposed corner of the range. + Mark a single cell + Do one of the following: + + + Click, then Shift-click the cell. + + + Pressing the mouse button, drag a range across two cells, do not release the mouse button, and then drag back to the first cell. Release the mouse button. You can now move the individual cell by drag and drop. + + + Select various dispersed cells + Do one of the following: + + + Mark at least one cell. Then while pressing Command +Ctrl, click each of the additional cells. + + + Click the STD / EXT / ADD area in the status bar until it shows ADD. Now click all cells that you want to select. + + + Switch marking mode + On the status bar, click the box with the legend STD / EXT / ADD to switch the marking mode: + + + + Field contents + + + Effect of clicking the mouse + + + + + STD + + + A mouse click selects the cell you have clicked on. Unmarks all marked cells. + + + + + EXT + + + A mouse click marks a rectangular range from the current cell to the cell you clicked. Alternatively, Shift-click a cell. + + + + + ADD + + + A mouse click in a cell adds it to the already marked cells. A mouse click in a marked cell unmarks it. Alternatively, Command +Ctrl-click the cells. + + +

-Status bar -

- - +

+ Status bar +

+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp index a06b85a258..32644ced09 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Inserting and Editing Comments -/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + Inserting and Editing Comments + /text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp + + + comments; on cells -cells;comments -comments; on cells -remarks on cells -formatting;comments on cells -viewing;comments on cells + cells;comments + comments; on cells + remarks on cells + formatting;comments on cells + viewing;comments on cells -Inserting and Editing Comments +Inserting and Editing Comments -You can assign a comment to each cell by choosing Insert - Comment. The comment is indicated by a small red square, the comment indicator, in the cell. - - -The comment is visible whenever the mouse pointer is over the cell, provided you have activated Help - Tips or - Extended Tips. - - -When you select the cell, you can choose Show Comment from the context menu of the cell. Doing so keeps the comment visible until you deactivate the Show Comment command from the same context menu. - - -To edit a permanently visible comment, just click in it. If you delete the entire text of the comment, the comment itself is deleted. - - -Move or resize each comment as you like. - - -Format each comment by specifying background color, transparency, border style, and text alignment. Choose the commands from the context menu of the comment. - - -To show or hide the comment indicator, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and mark or unmark the Comment indicator check box. - - -To display a help tip for a selected cell, use Data - Validity - Input Help. -

-Insert - Comment -

- - + You can assign a comment to each cell by choosing Insert - Comment. The comment is indicated by a small red square, the comment indicator, in the cell. + + + The comment is visible whenever the mouse pointer is over the cell, if you did enable tips under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. + + + When you select the cell, you can choose Show Comment from the context menu of the cell. Doing so keeps the comment visible until you deactivate the Show Comment command from the same context menu. + + + To edit a permanently visible comment, just click in it. If you delete the entire text of the comment, the comment itself is deleted. + + + Move or resize each comment as you like. + + + Format each comment by specifying background color, transparency, border style, and text alignment. Choose the commands from the context menu of the comment. + + + To show or hide the comment indicator, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and mark or unmark the Comment indicator check box. + + + To display a help tip for a selected cell, use Data - Validity - Input Help. +

+ Insert - Comment +

+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp index 77d406e68e..a4b810299a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Numbering Style -/text/shared/01/06050200.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -

-Numbering -Displays the different numbering styles that you can apply. -

+ + Numbering Style + /text/shared/01/06050200.xhp + + + +

+ Numbering + Displays the different numbering styles that you can apply. +

-Selection -Click the numbering style that you want to use. -

-Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) - - -Indents & Spacing tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) - - -Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) -

- - +Selection + Click the numbering style that you want to use. +

+ Position tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) + Options tab (Bullets and Numbering dialog) +

+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp index e8f1074c1b..8cfa56e62e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Formatting Mark - +/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp @@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ CTL;(not) wrapping words words;wrapping in CTL -MW added 2 index entries because of issue 86750tried to fix i86464 by creating a new file, copy everything over, then save & overwrite as formatting_mark.xhp +MW added 2 index entries because of issue 86750tried to fix i86464 by creating a new file, copy everything over, then save & overwrite as formatting_mark.xhpbut this did not help Formatting Mark Opens a submenu to insert special formatting marks. Enable CTL for more commands. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp index dbf316f75e..5bb5d2a70b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/password_dlg.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -42,20 +42,22 @@

- Password Assigns a password to prevent users from making unauthorized changes.

- +Password Type a password. A password is case sensitive. + Confirm - Re-enter the password. + Re-enter the password. Undoing password protection To remove a password, re-open this dialog, and then enter the password. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp index 7e50fc04b7..a0c681a6af 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ Explorer On/Off -Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer. The Explorer On/Off icon is visible on the Table Data bar. +Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer. The Explorer On/Off icon is visible on the Table Data bar.

@@ -67,7 +67,7 @@

-In the data source explorer you see the data sources registered in $[officename] with their links, queries and tables. +In the data source explorer you see the data sources registered in $[officename] with their queries and tables. Establishing a connection - As soon as you select an individual table or query, a connection to the data source is established. Once the connection is opened, the name of the data source, the Queries or Tables entry, and the name of the query or table selected is shown in bold type.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp index 8853dde826..a6a8b413c2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12100200.xhp @@ -279,11 +279,11 @@

- If you want to search for the actual characters ? or *, preface them with a backslash: "\?" or "\*". However, this is only necessary when Wildcard expression is enabled. When the option is not enabled, the wildcard characters are processed like normal characters. + If you want to search for the actual characters ? or *, preface them with a backslash: "\?" or "\*". However, this is only necessary when Wildcard expression is enabled. When the option is not enabled, the wildcard characters are processed like normal characters. Regular expression - Searches with regular expressions. The same regular expressions that are supported here are also supported in the %PRODUCTNAMEFind & Replace dialog. + Searches with regular expressions. The same regular expressions that are supported here are also supported in the %PRODUCTNAME Find & Replace dialog. Searching with regular expressions offers more options than searching with wildcard expressions. If you search with regular expressions, the following characters correspond to those used in searches with wildcards: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp index c0f06f2f30..2a21c5544a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/insert_bitmap.xhp @@ -79,8 +79,7 @@ Click the Link box if you want a link to the original file. If the Link box is marked, whenever the document is updated and loaded the bitmap image is reloaded. The editing steps that you have carried out in the local copy of the image in the document are re-applied and the image is displayed. If the Link box is not marked, you are always working with the copy created when the graphic was first inserted. -To embed graphics that were first inserted as links, go to Edit -- Links and click the Break Link button. +To embed graphics that were first inserted as links, go to Edit - Links and click the Break Link button. Click Open to insert the image. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp index f230251017..01ec536ec0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: ms_import_export_limitations.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.6.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,170 +35,173 @@ - -About Converting Microsoft Office Documents -/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp - - - + + About Converting Microsoft Office Documents + /text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp + + + Microsoft Office;document import restrictions -import restrictions for Microsoft Office -Microsoft Office;importing password protected files + import restrictions for Microsoft Office + Microsoft Office;importing password protected files MW moved "Microsoft Office;" from shared/guide/protection.xhp - -About Converting Microsoft Office Documents + + About Converting Microsoft Office Documents -$[officename] can automatically open Microsoft Office 97/2000/XP documents. However, some layout features and formatting attributes in more complex Microsoft Office documents are handled differently in $[officename] or are unsupported. As a result, converted files require some degree of manual reformatting. The amount of reformatting that can be expected is proportional to the complexity of the structure and formatting of the source document. $[officename] cannot run Visual Basic Scripts, but can load them for you to analyze. -The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can load, but not save, the Microsoft Office Open XML document formats with the extensions docx, xlsx, and pptx. The same versions can also run some Excel Visual Basic scripts, if you enable this feature at Tools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. -The following lists provide a general overview of Microsoft Office features that may cause conversion challenges. These will not affect your ability to use or work with the content of the converted document. -Microsoft Word - - -AutoShapes - - -Revision marks - - -OLE objects - - -Certain controls and Microsoft Office form fields - - -Indexes - - -Tables, frames, and multi-column formatting - - -Hyperlinks and bookmarks - - -Microsoft WordArt graphics - - -Animated characters/text - - -Microsoft PowerPoint - - -AutoShapes - - -Tab, line, and paragraph spacing - - -Master background graphics - - -Grouped objects - - -Certain multimedia effects - - -Microsoft Excel - - -AutoShapes - - -OLE objects - - -Certain controls and Microsoft Office form fields - - -Pivot tables - - -New chart types - - -Conditional formatting - - -Some functions/formulas (see below) - - -One example of differences between Calc and Excel is the handling of boolean values. Enter TRUE to cells A1 and A2. - - -In Calc, the formula =A1+A2 returns the value 2, and the formula =SUM(A1;A2) returns 2. - - -In Excel, the formula =A1+A2 returns 2, but the formula =SUM(A1,A2) returns 0.in SUM(A1<limiter>A2), use the Excel limiter comma , in English and semicolon ; in German - - -For a detailed overview about converting documents to and from Microsoft Office format, see the Migration Guide. -Opening Microsoft Office Documents That Are Protected With a Password -%PRODUCTNAME can open the following Microsoft Office document types that are protected by a password. -

- - -Microsoft Office format - - -Supported encryption method - - - - -Word 6.0, Word 95 - - -Weak XOR encryption - - - - -Word 97, Word 2000, Word XP, Word 2003 - - -Office 97/2000 compatible encryption - - - - -Word XP, Word 2003 - - -Weak XOR encryption from older Word versions - - - - -Excel 2.1, Excel 3.0, Excel 4.0, Excel 5.0, Excel 95 - - -Weak XOR encryption - - - - -Excel 97, Excel 2000, Excel XP, Excel 2003 - - -Office 97/2000 compatible encryption - - - - -Excel XP, Excel 2003 - - -Weak XOR encryption from older Excel versions - - -

+ $[officename] can automatically open Microsoft Office 97/2000/XP documents. However, some layout features and formatting attributes in more complex Microsoft Office documents are handled differently in $[officename] or are unsupported. As a result, converted files require some degree of manual reformatting. The amount of reformatting that can be expected is proportional to the complexity of the structure and formatting of the source document. $[officename] cannot run Visual Basic Scripts, but can load them for you to analyze. + The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can load, but not save, the Microsoft Office Open XML document formats with the extensions docx, xlsx, and pptx. The same versions can also run some Excel Visual Basic scripts, if you enable this feature at Tools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. + The following lists provide a general overview of Microsoft Office features that may cause conversion challenges. These will not affect your ability to use or work with the content of the converted document. + Microsoft Word + + + AutoShapes + + + Revision marks + + + OLE objects + + + Certain controls and Microsoft Office form fields + + + Indexes + + + Tables, frames, and multi-column formatting + + + Hyperlinks and bookmarks + + + Microsoft WordArt graphics + + + Animated characters/text + + + Microsoft PowerPoint + + + AutoShapes + + + Tab, line, and paragraph spacing + + + Master background graphics + + + Grouped objects + + + Certain multimedia effects + + + Microsoft Excel + + + AutoShapes + + + OLE objects + + + Certain controls and Microsoft Office form fields + + + Pivot tables + + + New chart types + + + Conditional formatting + + + Some functions/formulas (see below) + + + One example of differences between Calc and Excel is the handling of boolean values. Enter TRUE to cells A1 and A2. + + + In Calc, the formula =A1+A2 returns the value 2, and the formula =SUM(A1;A2) returns 2. + + + In Excel, the formula =A1+A2 returns 2, but the formula =SUM(A1,A2) returns 0.in SUM(A1<limiter>A2), use the Excel limiter comma , in English and semicolon ; in German + + + For a detailed overview about converting documents to and from Microsoft Office format, see the Migration Guide. + Opening Microsoft Office Documents That Are Protected With a Password + %PRODUCTNAME can open the following Microsoft Office document types that are protected by a password. + + + + Microsoft Office format + + + Supported encryption method + + + + + Word 6.0, Word 95 + + + Weak XOR encryption + + + + + Word 97, Word 2000, Word XP, Word 2003 + + + Office 97/2000 compatible encryption + + + + + Word XP, Word 2003 + + + Weak XOR encryption from older Word versions + + + + + Excel 2.1, Excel 3.0, Excel 4.0, Excel 5.0, Excel 95 + + + Weak XOR encryption + + + + + Excel 97, Excel 2000, Excel XP, Excel 2003 + + + Office 97/2000 compatible encryption + + + + + Excel XP, Excel 2003 + + + Weak XOR encryption from older Excel versions + + +

-Other encryption methods are not supported. -

-Setting the default file format -

- - + Starting from OpenOffice.org 3.2 or StarOffice 9.2, Microsoft Office files that are encrypted by AES128 can be opened. Other encryption methods are not supported. +

+ Setting the default file format +

+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp index 1b591b1114..083922ca93 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Start Center - + /text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp index 5e87e71c59..677c5d006c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0212.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Table Data Bar -/text/shared/main0212.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -

-Table Data Bar -Use the Table Data bar to control the data view. -

-The filtered data view is active until you change or cancel the sorting or filtering criteria. If a filter is active, the Apply Filter icon on the Table Data bar is activated. -

- - - - -

Icon + + Table Data Bar + /text/shared/main0212.xhp + + + +

+ Table Data Bar + Use the Table Data bar to control the data view. +

+ The filtered data view is active until you change or cancel the sorting or filtering criteria. If a filter is active, the Apply Filter icon on the Table Data bar is activated. +

+ + + +

Icon - - -Save Record - - -

- - - - -

Icon + + + Save Record + + +

+ + + + +

Icon - - -Undo: Data Input - - -

+ + + Undo: Data Input + + + +

-Data to Text -Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position. -

-Mail Merge -Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters. -

- - +Data to Text + Inserts all fields of the marked record into the current document at the cursor position. +

+Help ID is here because we need it in shared since the F4 browser has another context "sdatabase" so I had to move the Help ID from the swriter folder +Mail Merge + Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters. +

+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp index 53bc948858..fd86238b8a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Improvement Program - + /text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/tree_strings.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/tree_strings.xhp index f06b372c8c..33923e6965 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/tree_strings.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/tree_strings.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ <node id="0205" title="Tables in Text Documents"> <node id="0206" title="Objects in Text Documents"> <node id="0207" title="Sections and Frames in Text Documents"> - <node id="0208" title="Tables of Content and Indexes"> + <node id="0208" title="Tables of Contents and Indexes"> <node id="0209" title="Fields in Text Documents"> <node id="0210" title="Navigating Text Documents"> <node id="0211" title="Calculating in Text Documents"> diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp index 4facd03491..57d0d8b36c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 02120000.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.6.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,66 +35,74 @@ - -Duplicate -/text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp - - - + + Duplicate + /text/simpress/01/02120000.xhp + + + -Duplicate -Makes one or more copies of a selected object. +Duplicate + Makes one or more copies of a selected object. -

-Number of copies -Enter the number of copies you want to make. +Number of copies + Enter the number of copies you want to make. -Values from selection - - - - -

Icon +Values from selection +

+ + + +

Icon - - -Enters the width and the height values of the selected object in the X axis and the Y axis boxes respectively as well as the fill color of the object in the Start box. The rotation angle of the selected object is not entered. - - -

+ + + Enters the width and the height values of the selected object in the X axis and the Y axis boxes respectively as well as the fill color of the object in the Start box. The rotation angle of the selected object is not entered. + + + -Placement -Sets the position and rotation of a duplicate object with respect to the selected object. + Placement + Sets the position and rotation of a duplicate object with respect to the selected object. -X axis -Enter the horizontal distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positd object to the right and negatd object to the left. +X axis + Enter the horizontal distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object to the right and negative values shift the duplicate object to the left. -Y axis -Enter the vertical distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object down and negative values shift the duplicate object up. +Y axis + Enter the vertical distance between the centers of the selected object and the duplicate object. Positive values shift the duplicate object down and negative values shift the duplicate object up. -Angle -Enter the angle (0 to 359 degrees) by which you want to rotate the duplicate object. Positive values rotate the duplicate object in a clockwise direction and negative values in a counterclockwise direction. -Enlargement -Sets the size of a duplicate object. +Angle + Enter the angle (0 to 359 degrees) by which you want to rotate the duplicate object. Positive values rotate the duplicate object in a clockwise direction and negative values in a counterclockwise direction. + Enlargement + Sets the size of a duplicate object. -Width -Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the width of the duplicate object. +Width + Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the width of the duplicate object. -Height -Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the height of the duplicate object. -Colors -Sets the colors for the selected object and the duplicate object. If you make more than one copy, these colors define the start and end points of a color gradient. +Height + Enter the amount by which you want to enlarge or reduce the height of the duplicate object. + Colors + Sets the colors for the selected object and the duplicate object. If you make more than one copy, these colors define the start and end points of a color gradient. -Start -Choose a color for the selected object. +Start + Choose a color for the selected object. -End -Choose a color for the duplicate object. If you are making more than one copy, this color is applied to the last copy. -

- - +End + Choose a color for the duplicate object. If you are making more than one copy, this color is applied to the last copy. +

+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp index 0b2f4eff8d..2f9ee0a09f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/mailmerge00.xhp @@ -47,9 +47,8 @@ - -UFI: inserted help idsMail Merge Wizard +UFI: inserted help idsUFI: moved DSBFormLetter ID to shared/main0212Mail Merge Wizard Starts the Mail Merge Wizard to create form letters or send e-mail messages to many recipients.

-- cgit From f93153f617a109f1249802a49ce747b64faaeab4 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Fri, 16 Oct 2009 08:59:46 +0000 Subject: Zwischenstand --- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp | 8 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp | 1 - .../source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp | 110 +++--- .../text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp | 224 ++++++------ .../text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp | 144 ++++---- .../source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp | 13 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp | 9 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp | 25 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp | 22 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp | 63 ++-- .../text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp | 84 +---- .../source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp | 390 ++++++++++----------- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp | 125 +++---- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp | 361 +++++++++---------- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp | 127 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp | 104 +++--- .../source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp | 8 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp | 112 +++--- .../source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp | 32 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp | 10 +- .../text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp | 50 +-- 26 files changed, 984 insertions(+), 1054 deletions(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp index 0774564c79..d8bcbea6f3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp @@ -740,14 +740,14 @@ oldref="640">Example POWER -Returns a number raised to a power. +Returns a number raised to another number. Syntax -POWER(Base; Power) -Returns Base raised to the power of Power. +POWER(Base; Exponent) +Returns Base raised to the power of Exponent. The same result may be achieved by using the exponentiation operator ^: -Base^Power +Base^Exponent Example diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp index ab90880518..7f75839ecb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060109.xhp @@ -243,7 +243,6 @@ A1 (optional) - if set to 0, the R1C1 notation is used. If this parameter is absent or set to another value than 0, the A1 notation is used. If you open an Excel spreadsheet that uses indirect addresses calculated from string functions, the sheet addresses will not be translated automatically. For example, the Excel address in INDIRECT("filename!sheetname"&B1) is not converted into the Calc address in INDIRECT("filename.sheetname"&B1).UFI: for #i34465# - INDIRECT cannot resolve range names as in INDIRECT("RangeName").i83070 Example diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp index 842362762f..7d97cabc0d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Formatting Numbers With Decimals -/text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -numbers; formatting in tables -formats; numbers in tables -tables; number formats -defaults; number formats in spreadsheets -decimal places;formatting numbers -formatting;numbers with decimals -formatting;adding/deleting decimal places -number formats; adding/deleting decimal places in cells -deleting; decimal places -decimal places; adding/deleting -mw changed one index entrymw inserted three index entries from scalc/02/02160000.xhp and three index entries from scalc/02/02170000.xhp. Then changed three index entries and deleted two.mw deleted one "number formats;..." entry and changed the other -Formatting Numbers With Decimals + + Formatting Numbers With Decimals + /text/scalc/guide/format_value.xhp + + + +numbers;formatting decimals + formats; numbers in tables + tables; number formats + defaults; number formats in spreadsheets + decimal places;formatting numbers + formatting;numbers with decimals + formatting;adding/deleting decimal places + number formats; adding/deleting decimal places in cells + deleting; decimal places + decimal places; adding/deleting +mw changed "numbers;" +Formatting Numbers With Decimals -Enter a number into the sheet, for example, 1234.5678. This number will be displayed in the default number format, with two decimal places. You will see 1234.57 when you confirm the entry. Only the display in the document will be rounded off; internally, the number retains all four decimal places after the decimal point. -To format numbers with decimals: - - -Set the cursor at the number and choose Format - Cells to start the Format Cells dialog. - - -On the Numbers tab you will see a selection of predefined number formats. In the bottom right in the dialog you will see a preview of how your current number would look if you were to give it a particular format. - - - - - - -

Icon + Enter a number into the sheet, for example, 1234.5678. This number will be displayed in the default number format, with two decimal places. You will see 1234.57 when you confirm the entry. Only the display in the document will be rounded off; internally, the number retains all four decimal places after the decimal point. + To format numbers with decimals: + + + Set the cursor at the number and choose Format - Cells to start the Format Cells dialog. + + + On the Numbers tab you will see a selection of predefined number formats. In the bottom right in the dialog you will see a preview of how your current number would look if you were to give it a particular format. + + +

+ + + +

Icon - - -If you only want to modify the number of the decimal places displayed, the easiest method is to use the Number Format: Add Decimal Place or Number Format: Delete Decimal Place icons on the Formatting Bar. - - -

+ + + If you only want to modify the number of the decimal places displayed, the easiest method is to use the Number Format: Add Decimal Place or Number Format: Delete Decimal Place icons on the Formatting Bar. + + + -

- - +

+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp index 659656e40c..1144320d0d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -User-defined Number Formats -/text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp - - - - - - -numbers; user-defined formatting in tables -formatting; user-defined numbers -number formats; millions -format codes; user-defined number formats - - mw copied "format codes;" from shared/01/05020300.xhp - User-defined Number Formats + + User-defined Number Formats + /text/scalc/guide/format_value_userdef.xhp + + + +numbers;user-defined formatting + formatting; user-defined numbers + number formats; millions + format codes; user-defined number formats +mw changed "numbers;" +User-defined Number Formats - You can define your own number formats to display numbers in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. - As an example, to display the number 10,200,000 as 10.2 Million: - - - Select the cells to which you want to apply a new, user-defined format. - - - Choose Format - Cells - Numbers. - - - In the Categories list box select "User-defined". - - - In the Format code text box enter the following code: - 0.0,, "Million" - - - Click OK. - - - The following table shows the effects of rounding, thousands delimiters (,), decimal delimiters (.) and the placeholders # and 0. - - - - - - Number - - - .#,, "Million" - - - 0.0,, "Million" - - - #,, "Million" - - - - - 10200000 - - - 10.2 Million - - - 10.2 Million - - - 10 Million - - - - - 500000 - - - .5 Million - - - 0.5 Million - - - 1 Million - - - - - 100000000 - - - 100. Million - - - 100.0 Million - - - 100 Million - - -

- -

- - + You can define your own number formats to display numbers in %PRODUCTNAME Calc. + As an example, to display the number 10,200,000 as 10.2 Million: + + + Select the cells to which you want to apply a new, user-defined format. + + + Choose Format - Cells - Numbers. + + + In the Categories list box select "User-defined". + + + In the Format code text box enter the following code: + 0.0,, "Million" + + + Click OK. + + + The following table shows the effects of rounding, thousands delimiters (,), decimal delimiters (.) and the placeholders # and 0. + + + + Number + + + .#,, "Million" + + + 0.0,, "Million" + + + #,, "Million" + + + + + 10200000 + + + 10.2 Million + + + 10.2 Million + + + 10 Million + + + + + 500000 + + + .5 Million + + + 0.5 Million + + + 1 Million + + + + + 100000000 + + + 100. Million + + + 100.0 Million + + + 100 Million + + +

+ +

+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp index 9612575904..ed941f9763 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Entering a Number with Leading Zeros -/text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp - - - + + Entering a Number with Leading Zeros + /text/scalc/guide/integer_leading_zero.xhp + + + zero values; entering leading zeros -numbers; with leading zeros -leading zeros -integers with leading zeros -numbers; changing text/number formats -cells; changing text/number formats -formats; changing text/number -text in cells; changing to numbers -converting; text to numbers -UFI: inserted "converting;text to numbers"Entering a Number with Leading Zeros + numbers; with leading zeros + leading zeros + integers with leading zeros + cells; changing text/number formats + formats; changing text/number + text in cells; changing to numbers + converting;text with leading zeros, into numbers +UFI: inserted "converting;text to numbers"mw changed "converting;" and deleted "numbers,changing..." +Entering a Number with Leading Zeros -

-There are various ways to enter integers starting with a zero: - - -Enter the number as text. The easiest way is to enter the number starting with an apostrophe (for example, '0987). The apostrophe will not appear in the cell, and the number will be formatted as text. Because it is in text format, however, you cannot calculate with this number. - - -Format a cell with a number format such as \0000. This format can be assigned in the Format code field under the Format - Cells - Numbers tab, and defines the cell display as "always put a zero first and then the integer, having at least three places, and filled with zeros at the left if less than three digits". - - - -If you want to apply a numerical format to a column of numbers in text format (for example, text "000123" becomes number "123"), do the following: - - -Select the column in which the digits are found in text format. Set the cell format in that column as "Number". - - -Choose Edit - Find & Replace - - - -In the Search for box, enter ^[0-9] - - - -In the Replace with box, enter & - - - -Check Regular expressions - - - -Check Current selection only - - - -Click Replace All - - - -

- - +

+ There are various ways to enter integers starting with a zero: + + + Enter the number as text. The easiest way is to enter the number starting with an apostrophe (for example, '0987). The apostrophe will not appear in the cell, and the number will be formatted as text. Because it is in text format, however, you cannot calculate with this number. + + + Format a cell with a number format such as \0000. This format can be assigned in the Format code field under the Format - Cells - Numbers tab, and defines the cell display as "always put a zero first and then the integer, having at least three places, and filled with zeros at the left if less than three digits". + + + + If you want to apply a numerical format to a column of numbers in text format (for example, text "000123" becomes number "123"), do the following: + + + Select the column in which the digits are found in text format. Set the cell format in that column as "Number". + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace + + + + In the Search for box, enter ^[0-9] + + + + In the Replace with box, enter & + + + + Check Regular expressions + + + + Check Current selection only + + + + Click Replace All + + + +

+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp index 5d8e0a1636..b5d5299423 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/numbers_text.xhp @@ -41,9 +41,11 @@ -converting;text to numbers -formats; text as numbers - +formats; text as numbers + time format conversion + date formats;conversion + converting;text, into numbers +mw changed "converting;" and added two index entries Converting Text to Numbers

@@ -84,9 +86,12 @@ If only a time string is given, it may have an hours value of more than 24, while minutes and seconds can have a maximum value of 59. The conversion is done for single arguments only, as in =A1+A2, or ="1E2"+1. Cell range arguments are not affected, so SUM(A1:A2) differs from A1+A2 if at least one of the two cells contain a convertible string. Strings inside formulas are also converted, such as in ="1999-11-22"+42, which returns the date 42 days after November 22nd, 1999. Calculations involving localized dates as strings inside the formula return an error. For example, the localized date string "11/22/1999" or "22.11.1999" cannot be used for the automatic conversion. + Example + In A1 enter the text '1e2 (which is converted to the number 100 internally). + In A2 enter =A1+1 (which correctly results in 101).

Format - Cells - Numbers

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp index 940a88fdf8..37ccfb1ad4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/text_numbers.xhp @@ -41,13 +41,12 @@ -numbers; as text +numbers;entering as text text formats; for numbers - numbers; entering without number formats formats; numbers as text cell formats; text/numbers formatting;numbers as text - +mw deleted "numbers; entering without..." and changed "numbers;as text" Formatting Numbers as Text @@ -57,8 +56,8 @@ If you decide to enter a number directly as text, enter an apostrophe (') first. For example, for years in column headings, you can enter '1999, '2000 and '2001. The apostrophe is not visible in the cell, it only indicates that the entry is to be recognized as a text. This is useful if, for example, you enter a telephone number or postal code that begins with a zero (0), because a zero (0) at the start of a sequence of digits is removed in normal number formats.

Format - Cells - Numbers

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp index 20ef489737..68c33ce303 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04030000.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -64,41 +64,46 @@ -Show value as number Displays the absolute values of the data points. -Number format +Number format Opens a dialog to select the number format. -Show value as percentage Displays the percentage of the data points in each column. -Percentage format +Percentage format Opens a dialog to select the percentage format. -Show category Shows the data point text labels. -Show legend key Displays the legend icons next to each data point label. -Separator +Separator Selects the separator between multiple text strings for the same object. -Placement +Placement Selects the placement of data labels relative to the objects. -Text Direction +Text Direction Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. + +Rotate Text + Click in the dial to set the text orientation for the data labels. + +Enter the rotation angle for the data labels. A positive number rotates the text to the left and a negative number rotates the text to the right. \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp index a4b810299a..cb699afc17 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp @@ -226,7 +226,7 @@ ODF 1.2 - to be announced + - OpenOffice.org 3 or StarOffice 9 @@ -234,10 +234,10 @@ - ODF 1.2 enhanced + ODF 1.2 (Extended) - to be announced + - OpenOffice.org 3.2 or StarOffice 9.2 diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp index d6fcd04818..0083ec417e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp @@ -227,7 +227,7 @@ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - -Position and Size - Legend tab (only for textbox callouts, not for custom shapes callouts) +Position and Size - Callout tab (only for textbox callouts, not for custom shapes callouts)

Choose Edit - Points diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp index 533a05b40d..79eb1411a1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02100001.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -198,7 +198,8 @@ [a-e] - Represents any of the characters that are between a and e. + Represents any of the characters that are between a and e, including both start and end characters + The characters are ordered by their code numbers. @@ -214,7 +215,7 @@ [^a-s] - Represents any character that is not between a and s. + Represents everything that is not between a and s. @@ -231,7 +232,7 @@ | - Finds the terms that occur before or after the "|". For example, "this|that" finds "this" and "that". + Finds the terms that occur before the "|" and also finds the terms that occur after the "|". For example, "this|that" finds "this" and "that". @@ -239,7 +240,7 @@ {2} - Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket occurs. For example, "tre{2}" finds "tree". + Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket occurs. For example, "tre{2}" finds and selects "tree". @@ -247,7 +248,7 @@ {1,2} - Defines the number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{1,2}" finds both "tree" and "treated". + Defines the minimum and maximum number of times that the character in front of the opening bracket can occur. For example, "tre{1,2}" finds and selects "tre" and "tree". @@ -333,7 +334,7 @@ Represents an uppercase character if Match case is selected in Options. - + @@ -348,7 +349,12 @@ $ means the match must end a paragraph.

- Wiki page about regular expressions in Writer + +

+ + +Wiki page about regular expressions in Writer Wiki page about regular expressions in Calc

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp index 3c61a0231a..f8045f39ba 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp @@ -49,8 +49,8 @@ numbers; date, time and currency formats Euro; currency formats date formats - times, formats -mw made "time formats" a two level entry and deleted 2x "formats;" + times;formats +mw made "time formats" a two level entry and deleted 2x "formats;"mw corrected a typo in "times, formats" Number Format Codes Number format codes can consist of up to three sections separated by a semicolon (;). diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp index 4049929f3e..64ce51b804 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,8 @@ - - - + ************************************************************************ + --> + - - -Row Height -/text/shared/01/05340100.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - - + + Row Height + /text/shared/01/05340100.xhp + + + + -Row Height - -Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows. +Row Height + Changes the height of the current row, or the selected rows. - -You can also change the height of a row by dragging the divider below the row header. To fit the row height to the cell contents, double-click the divider. + You can also change the height of a row by dragging the divider below the row header. To fit the row height to the cell contents, double-click the divider. -

-Height -Enter the row height that you want to use. +Height + Enter the row height that you want to use. - -Default value -Automatic -Automatically adjusts the row height based on the current font. - - +Default value + Adjusts the row height to the size based on the default template. Existing contents may be shown vertically cropped. The height no longer increases automatically when you enter larger contents. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp index 194cbc1abb..a3345a938c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp @@ -1,7 +1,4 @@ - - - - - + Adabas D Database @@ -44,11 +40,10 @@ Adabas D Database -Adabas D by Software AG is installed when you install the commercial office software by Sun Microsystems, Inc. -If you are using OpenOffice.org software, the Adabas D software package can be downloaded and installed separately (see www.adabas.com). -The Adabas D database that you may have installed together with $[officename] is a limited version of the database. For more information on Adabas, visit the Software AG Web site at http://www.softwareag.com/adabas/. +The Adabas D software package can be downloaded and installed separately (see www.adabas.com). +The free Adabas D database is a limited version of the database. For more information on Adabas, visit the Software AG Web site at http://www.softwareag.com/adabas/. About Adabas -The Adabas database that you may have installed together with $[officename] is restricted to a size of 100 MB, and a maximum of three users on a network. See the "License.txt" file in the Adabas directory for more details. The Adabas database must be installed in a separate directory from $[officename]. +The free Adabas database is restricted to a size of 100 MB, and a maximum of three users on a network. See the "License.txt" file in the Adabas directory for more details. The Adabas database must be installed in a separate directory from $[officename]. The name of an Adabas file cannot exceed 8 characters. The path to the Adabas file, including the file name, cannot exceed 30 characters, and must be compliant with the 7-bit ASCII code. Both the path and the file name cannot contain spaces. Under Windows, the Adabas setup application adds the DBROOT environment variable that contains the path information for the database. If the setup application finds this variable, it does not install the database. Create New Adabas Database @@ -66,76 +61,5 @@ Deleting an Adabas Database To delete the reference to an Adabas database, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. Select the database, and then click Delete. -To delete an Adabas database: - - -Determine which directories are referred to by the system variables DBCONFIG and DBWORK. Under Windows these variables are defined in the system settings or in the c:\Autoexec.bat file. - Under Unix these variables are defined in a startup script. - - - -In the $DBCONFIG$ directory, delete the three files that have the same name as the database, but with different extensions. For example, for a database named "Big", delete the "Big.sys", "Big.trs", and "Big.dat" files in the "C:\Adabas\". - - -In the $DBCONFIG$\Config directory, delete the file that has the same name as the database, for example, " C:\Adabas\Sql\Config\Big". - - -In the $DBWORKS$\Wrk directory, delete the directory that has the same name as the database., for example "C:\Adabas\Sql\Wrk\Big". - - -Starting and Shutting Down an Adabas Database - - -strt -d <DBNAME> -NoDBWindow -NoDBService -switches the database to COLD. - - -xutil -d <DBNAME> -u <CONTROLUSER>,<CONTROLPASSWORD> shutdown -switches the database to COLD. - - -xutil -d <DBNAME> -u <CONTROLUSER>,<CONTROLPASSWORD> restart -switches the database to WARM. - - -stp -d <DBNAME> -NoDBService -completely shuts down the database - - -Error Messages in an Adabas Database -The following is a list of possible error messages and solutions for working with the Adabas D database. -The database cannot be shut down / restarted as a user is still connected to it. -Close any other open tasks that show the database contents. On multi-user systems, ensure that all users are disconnected from the database, and then restart $[officename]. -Client unable to establish connection; -813 SERVERDB MUST BE RESTARTED -This error occurs if you try to access an Adabas D database that has not been started. Ensure that you have defined a Control User for the database, and then start the database. -Client unable to establish connection; -8022 USER ALREADY CONNECTED -This error occurs if you try to access an Adabas D database more than one time. -Errors occurring when writing the data in the database -Restart $[officename], and then change the database properties. -Running an Adabas Server on a Network -To run Adabas on a network, you need to install the Adabas server on one machine and the client on the workstations that you want to access the database from. -You can only create a new database on the server. -Enabling a Remote Connection - - -Under Windows, start the xtcpupd.exe support program on both the client and the server, and ensure that "Remote SQL via TCP/IP" is selected in the xtcpupd.exe dialog. - - -On the server, start the x_server program in adabas\bin -Adabas\bin directory. - - -Choose File - New - Database. - - -Click Connect to an existing database, and select "Adabas D" in the listbox. Click Next. - - -In the Name of the Adabas D database box, enter the name of the server, a colon, and the name of the database on the server, for example, computername:database. - - -Fill in the remaining pages of the Database Wizard. - - diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp index b68bb1240f..28477dbd8c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_send.xhp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Applying Digital Signatures MW created this file by splitting shared/guide/digital_signatures.xhp Getting a Certificate - You can get a certificate from a certification authority, which may be a private company or a governmental institution. Some certification authorities want money for their service, for example when they certify your identity. Other certificates are free of costs, for example those offered by some e-mail providers, which certify your e-mail address. A few of the companies that offer certificates to private persons are listed in the following, in alphabetical order: GlobalSign , Thawte, Verisign. + You can get a certificate from a certification authority, which may be a private company or a governmental institution. Some certification authorities want money for their service, for example when they certify your identity. Other certificates are free of costs, for example those offered by some e-mail providers, which certify your e-mail address. A few of the companies that offer certificates to private persons are listed in the following, in alphabetical order: GlobalSign, Verisign. Managing your Certificates diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp index 1fc3d0f77a..959eaa2b00 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: scripting.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.17.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,200 +35,198 @@ - -Scripting %PRODUCTNAME -/text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp - - - + + Scripting %PRODUCTNAME + /text/shared/guide/scripting.xhp + + + assigning scripts -programming;scripting -form controls;assigning macros -pictures;assigning macros -hyperlinks;assigning macros -shortcut keys;assigning macros -controls;assigning macros (Basic) -menus;assigning macros -events;assigning scripts + programming;scripting + form controls;assigning macros + pictures;assigning macros + hyperlinks;assigning macros + shortcut keys;assigning macros + controls;assigning macros (Basic) + menus;assigning macros + events;assigning scripts MW deleted "programming;...", "scripting in programming", "BeanShell scripting", "Basic;..." and "java;..."MW added "controls;..", "menus;..." and "events;..." -Assigning Scripts in %PRODUCTNAME +Assigning Scripts in %PRODUCTNAME -You can assign custom scripts (macros) to menu items, icons, dialog controls, and events in %PRODUCTNAME. -%PRODUCTNAME internally supports the following scripting languages: - - -%PRODUCTNAME Basic - - -JavaScript - - -BeanShell - - - - -Python (not included with all distributions)i50641removed switch, added text - - -In addition, developers can use high-level languages, for example Java programming language, to control %PRODUCTNAME externally. See the API project at OpenOffice.org. -To assign a script to a new menu entry - - -Choose Tools - Customize, and click the Menus tab. - - -Click Add. - - -In the Category list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. - - -You see entries for "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. - - -Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select a script. - - -A list of the script functions appears in the Commands list box. Select a function. - - -Click Add to create a new menu assignment. The new menu entry appears in the Entries list box. - - -To assign a script to a key combination - - -Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard. - - -In the Category list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. - - -You see entries for "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. - - -Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. - - -A list of the script functions will appear in the Commands list box. Select any function. - - -Click the option button for %PRODUCTNAME or Writer (or whichever application is currently open). -Selecting the option button sets the scope of the new key combination to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. - - -Select a key combination from the Shortcut keys list box and click Modify. - - -To assign a script to an event - - -Choose Tools - Customize - Events. - - -Click Macro button. - - -In the Library list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. - - -You see entries for "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. - - -Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. - - -A list of the script functions will appear in the Assigned Action list box. Select any function. - - -Select to save in %PRODUCTNAME or current document. -This sets the scope of the new event assignment to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. - - -Select an event from the list and click OK. - - -To assign a script to an event for an embedded object - - -Select the embedded object, for example a chart, in your document. - - -Choose Format - Frame/Object - Macro. - - -In the Macros list box, open the %PRODUCTNAME Scripts entry. - - -You see entries for share (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), user (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. - - -Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. - - -A list of the script functions will appear in the Existing macros in list box. Select any function. - - -Select an event from the list and click OK. - - -To assign a script to a hyperlink - - -Position the cursor inside the hyperlink. - - -Choose Insert - Hyperlink. - - -Click the Events button. - - -Select and assign as stated above. - - -To assign a script to a graphic - - -Select the graphic in your document. - - -Choose Format - Picture - Macro. - - -Select and assign as stated above. - - -To assign a script to a form control - - -Insert a form control, for example a button: Open the Form Controls toolbar, click the Push Button icon, drag open a button on your document. - - -With the form control selected, click Control on the Form Controls toolbar. - - -Click the Events tab of the Properties dialog. - - -Click one of the ... buttons to open a dialog where you can assign a script to the selected event. - - -To assign a script to a control in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic dialog - - -Open the %PRODUCTNAME Basic dialog editor, then create a dialog with a control on it. - - -Right-click the control, then choose Properties. - - -Click the Events tab of the Properties dialog. - - -Click one of the ... buttons to open a dialog where you can assign a script to the selected event. - - - - + You can assign custom scripts (macros) to menu items, icons, dialog controls, and events in %PRODUCTNAME. + %PRODUCTNAME internally supports the following scripting languages: + + + %PRODUCTNAME Basic + + + JavaScript + + + BeanShell + + + Python + + + In addition, developers can use high-level languages, for example Java programming language, to control %PRODUCTNAME externally. See the API project at OpenOffice.org. + To assign a script to a new menu entry + + + Choose Tools - Customize, and click the Menus tab. + + + Click Add. + + + In the Category list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. + + + You see entries for "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + + + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select a script. + + + A list of the script functions appears in the Commands list box. Select a function. + + + Click Add to create a new menu assignment. The new menu entry appears in the Entries list box. + + + To assign a script to a key combination + + + Choose Tools - Customize - Keyboard. + + + In the Category list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. + + + You see entries for "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + + + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. + + + A list of the script functions will appear in the Commands list box. Select any function. + + + Click the option button for %PRODUCTNAME or Writer (or whichever application is currently open). + Selecting the option button sets the scope of the new key combination to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. + + + Select a key combination from the Shortcut keys list box and click Modify. + + + To assign a script to an event + + + Choose Tools - Customize - Events. + + + Click Macro button. + + + In the Library list box, scroll down and open the "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" entry. + + + You see entries for "%PRODUCTNAME Macros" (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), "My Macros" (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + + + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. + + + A list of the script functions will appear in the Assigned Action list box. Select any function. + + + Select to save in %PRODUCTNAME or current document. + This sets the scope of the new event assignment to be applicable in all of %PRODUCTNAME or only in documents of the current module. + + + Select an event from the list and click OK. + + + To assign a script to an event for an embedded object + + + Select the embedded object, for example a chart, in your document. + + + Choose Format - Frame/Object - Macro. + + + In the Macros list box, open the %PRODUCTNAME Scripts entry. + + + You see entries for share (scripts in the share directory of your %PRODUCTNAME installation), user (scripts in the user directory), and the current document. Open any one of them to see the supported scripting languages. + + + Open any scripting language entry to see the available scripts. Select any script. + + + A list of the script functions will appear in the Existing macros in list box. Select any function. + + + Select an event from the list and click OK. + + + To assign a script to a hyperlink + + + Position the cursor inside the hyperlink. + + + Choose Insert - Hyperlink. + + + Click the Events button. + + + Select and assign as stated above. + + + To assign a script to a graphic + + + Select the graphic in your document. + + + Choose Format - Picture - Macro. + + + Select and assign as stated above. + + + To assign a script to a form control + + + Insert a form control, for example a button: Open the Form Controls toolbar, click the Push Button icon, drag open a button on your document. + + + With the form control selected, click Control on the Form Controls toolbar. + + + Click the Events tab of the Properties dialog. + + + Click one of the ... buttons to open a dialog where you can assign a script to the selected event. + + + To assign a script to a control in the %PRODUCTNAME Basic dialog + + + Open the %PRODUCTNAME Basic dialog editor, then create a dialog with a control on it. + + + Right-click the control, then choose Properties. + + + Click the Events tab of the Properties dialog. + + + Click one of the ... buttons to open a dialog where you can assign a script to the selected event. + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp index 8a7fe55cdb..bf02b8b7c4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - - + + + + - - -General -/text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - + + General + /text/shared/optionen/01010600.xhp + + + opening; dialog settings -saving; dialog settings -Open/Save dialogs -years; 2-digit options -Help Agent;options -Help;style sheets -mw changed "StarOffice Open/Save dialogs" to "Open/Save dialogs" - -

-General -Specifies the general settings for $[officename]. -

+ saving; dialog settings + years; 2-digit options + Help Agent;options + Help;style sheets +mw changed "StarOffice Open/Save dialogs" to "Open/Save dialogs"removed index "Open/Save dialogs", see i105788 + +

+ General + Specifies the general settings for $[officename]. +

-Year (two digits) -Defines a date range, within which the system recognizes a two-digit year. -

-In $[officename], years are indicated by four digits, so that the difference between 1/1/99 and 1/1/01 is two years. This Year (two digits) setting allows the user to define the years in which two-digit dates are added to 2000. To illustrate, if you specify a date of 1/1/30 or later, the entry "1/1/20" is recognized as 1/1/2020 instead of 1/1/1920. -

-Help -Specifies the behavior of the installed help. +Year (two digits) + Defines a date range, within which the system recognizes a two-digit year. +

+ In $[officename], years are indicated by four digits, so that the difference between 1/1/99 and 1/1/01 is two years. This Year (two digits) setting allows the user to define the years in which two-digit dates are added to 2000. To illustrate, if you specify a date of 1/1/30 or later, the entry "1/1/20" is recognized as 1/1/2020 instead of 1/1/1920. +

+ Help + Specifies the behavior of the installed help. -Tips -Displays the icon names and more bubble help information, for example, chapter names when you scroll through a document with chapters. +Tips + Displays the icon names and more bubble help information, for example, chapter names when you scroll through a document with chapters. -Extended tips -Displays a help text when you rest the cursor on an icon, a menu command, or a control on a dialog. +Extended tips + Displays a help text when you rest the cursor on an icon, a menu command, or a control on a dialog. -Help Agent -Specifies that the Help Agent will be displayed automatically in selected situations. Click the Help Agent window to see a Help page with information about the current context. +Help Agent + Specifies that the Help Agent will be displayed automatically in selected situations. Click the Help Agent window to see a Help page with information about the current context. -Reset Help Agent -If you have not opened the Help Agent for a particular situation three times in succession, but rather have closed it or let it close automatically, the Help Agent for this situation is not shown again. -Click Reset Help Agent to restore the default list of situations for which the Help Agent is displayed. -$[officename] Help formatting +Reset Help Agent + If you have not opened the Help Agent for a particular situation three times in succession, but rather have closed it or let it close automatically, the Help Agent for this situation is not shown again. + Click Reset Help Agent to restore the default list of situations for which the Help Agent is displayed. + $[officename] Help formatting -Style sheet -Choose the style of $[officename] Help. -Open/Save dialogsUFI: see spec doc "Gnome file selector" +Style sheet + Choose the style of $[officename] Help. + Open/Save dialogsUFI: see spec doc "Gnome file selector" -Use $[officename] dialogs -Specifies whether $[officename] dialogs are used to open and save documents. Otherwise the dialogs of the operating system are used. +Use $[officename] dialogs + Specifies whether $[officename] dialogs are used to open and save documents. Otherwise the dialogs of the operating system are used. -When you open a file by an URL from the Windows file dialog, Windows will open a local copy of the file, located in the Internet Explorer cache. The %PRODUCTNAME file dialog opens the remote file. +When you open a file by an URL from the Windows file dialog, Windows will open a local copy of the file, located in the Internet Explorer cache. The %PRODUCTNAME file dialog opens the remote file. -The $[officename] dialogs for opening and saving documents are described in $[officename] Help. -Document status +The $[officename] dialogs for opening and saving documents are described in $[officename] Help. + Document status -Printing sets "document modified" status -Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification. When this option is marked, the very next time the document is closed you are asked if the changes should be saved. The print date is then entered in the document properties as a change. - - +Printing sets "document modified" status + Specifies whether the printing of the document counts as a modification. When this option is marked, the very next time the document is closed you are asked if the changes should be saved. The print date is then entered in the document properties as a change. + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp index 8e12eb1056..7d63d5c6cf 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Calculate -/text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -

+ + Calculate + /text/shared/optionen/01060500.xhp + + + +

references; iterative (Calc) -calculating;iterative references (Calc) -iterative references in spreadsheets -recursions in spreadsheets -dates; default (Calc) -dates; start 1900/01/01 (Calc) -dates; start 1904/01/01 (Calc) -case sensitivity;comparing cell contents (Calc) -numbers; decimal places (Calc) -decimal places displayed (Calc) -precision as shown (Calc) -values; rounded as shown (Calc) -rounding precision (Calc) -search criteria for database functions in cells -Excel; search criteria -UFI: removed a double entrymw changed "cell contents;" to "case sensitivity;.." + calculating;iterative references (Calc) + iterative references in spreadsheets + recursions in spreadsheets + dates; default (Calc) + dates; start 1900/01/01 (Calc) + dates; start 1904/01/01 (Calc) + case sensitivity;comparing cell contents (Calc) + decimal places displayed (Calc) + precision as shown (Calc) + values; rounded as shown (Calc) + rounding precision (Calc) + search criteria for database functions in cells + Excel; search criteria +UFI: removed a double entrymw changed "cell contents;" to "case sensitivity;.."mw deleted "numbers;decimal places (Calc)" -Calculate -Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets. Defines the behavior of spreadsheets with iterative references, the date settings, the number of decimal places, and if capitalization or lower cases are to be considered when searching within sheets. -

-Iterative references -In this section you can delimit the number of approximation steps carried out during iterative calculations. In addition, you can specify the degree of precision of the answer. +Calculate + Defines the calculation settings for spreadsheets. Defines the behavior of spreadsheets with iterative references, the date settings, the number of decimal places, and if capitalization or lower cases are to be considered when searching within sheets. +

+ Iterative references + In this section you can delimit the number of approximation steps carried out during iterative calculations. In addition, you can specify the degree of precision of the answer. -Iterations -Specifies whether formulas with iterative references (formulas that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions. If the Iterations box is not marked, an iterative reference in the table will cause an error message. - -Example: calculating the cost of an item without the value-added tax. - - -Type the text 'Selling price' in cell A5, the text 'Net' in cell A6, and the text 'Value-added tax' in cell A7. - - -Now type a selling price (for example, 100) in cell B5. The net price should be shown in cell B6 and the value-added tax should be shown in cell B7. - - -You know that the value-added tax is calculated as 'net price times 15%' and that you arrive at the net price by deducting the value-added tax from the selling price. Type the formula =B5-B7 in B6 to calculate the net price, and type the formula =B6*0.15 in cell B7 to calculate the value-added tax. - - -Switch on the iterations to correctly calculate the formulas, otherwise a 'Circular reference' error message appears in the Status Bar. - - - - - - - -A - - -B - - - - -5 - - -Selling Price - - -100 - - - - -6 - - -Net - - -=B5-B7 - - - - -7 - - -Tax - - -=B6*0,15 - - -

+Iterations + Specifies whether formulas with iterative references (formulas that are continuously repeated until the problem is solved) are calculated after a specific number of repetitions. If the Iterations box is not marked, an iterative reference in the table will cause an error message. + + Example: calculating the cost of an item without the value-added tax. + + + Type the text 'Selling price' in cell A5, the text 'Net' in cell A6, and the text 'Value-added tax' in cell A7. + + + Now type a selling price (for example, 100) in cell B5. The net price should be shown in cell B6 and the value-added tax should be shown in cell B7. + + + You know that the value-added tax is calculated as 'net price times 15%' and that you arrive at the net price by deducting the value-added tax from the selling price. Type the formula =B5-B7 in B6 to calculate the net price, and type the formula =B6*0.15 in cell B7 to calculate the value-added tax. + + + Switch on the iterations to correctly calculate the formulas, otherwise a 'Circular reference' error message appears in the Status Bar. + + + + + + + + A + + + B + + + + + 5 + + + Selling Price + + + 100 + + + + + 6 + + + Net + + + =B5-B7 + + + + + 7 + + + Tax + + + =B6*0,15 + + +

-Steps -Sets the maximum number of iteration steps. +Steps + Sets the maximum number of iteration steps. -Minimum Change -Specifies the difference between two consecutive iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop. -Date -Select the start date for the internal conversion from days to numbers. +Minimum Change + Specifies the difference between two consecutive iteration step results. If the result of the iteration is lower than the minimum change value, then the iteration will stop. + Date + Select the start date for the internal conversion from days to numbers. -12/30/1899 (default) -Sets 12/30/1899 as day zero. +12/30/1899 (default) + Sets 12/30/1899 as day zero. -01/01/1900 (StarCalc 1.0) -Sets 1/1/1900 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries. +01/01/1900 (StarCalc 1.0) + Sets 1/1/1900 as day zero. Use this setting for StarCalc 1.0 spreadsheets containing date entries. -01/01/1904 -Sets 1/1/1904 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format. +01/01/1904 + Sets 1/1/1904 as day zero. Use this setting for spreadsheets that are imported in a foreign format. -Case sensitive -Specifies whether to distinguish between upper and lower case in texts when comparing cell contents. - -Example: Type the text 'Test' in cell A1; and the text 'test' in B1. Then type the formula "=A1=B1" in cell C1. If the Case sensitive box is marked, FALSE will appear in the cell; otherwise, TRUE will appear in the cell. -The EXACT text function is always case-sensitive, independent of the settings in this dialog. +Case sensitive + Specifies whether to distinguish between upper and lower case in texts when comparing cell contents. + + Example: Type the text 'Test' in cell A1; and the text 'test' in B1. Then type the formula "=A1=B1" in cell C1. If the Case sensitive box is marked, FALSE will appear in the cell; otherwise, TRUE will appear in the cell. + The EXACT text function is always case-sensitive, independent of the settings in this dialog. -Decimal places -Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the Standard number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers. +Decimal places + Defines the number of decimals to be displayed for numbers with the Standard number format. The numbers are displayed as rounded numbers, but are not saved as rounded numbers. -Precision as shown -Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet. Charts will be shown with the displayed values. If the Precision as shown option is not marked, the displayed numbers are rounded, but they are calculated internally using the non-rounded number. +Precision as shown + Specifies whether to make calculations using the rounded values displayed in the sheet. Charts will be shown with the displayed values. If the Precision as shown option is not marked, the displayed numbers are rounded, but they are calculated internally using the non-rounded number. -Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells -Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells box is marked, $[officename] Calc behaves exactly as MS Excel when searching cells in the database functions. - - - -.* in following position: - - -Search result: - - - - -win - - -Finds win, but not win95, os2win, or upwind - - - - -win.* - - -Finds win and win95, but not os2win or upwind - - - - -.*win - - -Finds win and os2win, but not win95 or upwind - - - - -.*win.* - - -Finds win, win95, os2win, and upwind - - -

+Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells + Specifies that the search criteria you set for the Calc database functions must match the whole cell exactly. When the Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells box is marked, $[officename] Calc behaves exactly as MS Excel when searching cells in the database functions. + + + + .* in following position: + + + Search result: + + + + + win + + + Finds win, but not win95, os2win, or upwind + + + + + win.* + + + Finds win and win95, but not os2win or upwind + + + + + .*win + + + Finds win and os2win, but not win95 or upwind + + + + + .*win.* + + + Finds win, win95, os2win, and upwind + + +

-If Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells is not enabled, the "win" search pattern acts like ".*win.*". The search pattern can be at any position within the cell when searching with the Calc database functions. + If Search criteria = and <> must apply to whole cells is not enabled, the "win" search pattern acts like ".*win.*". The search pattern can be at any position within the cell when searching with the Calc database functions. -Enable regular expressions in formulas -Specifies that regular expressions are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP and SEARCH. +Enable regular expressions in formulas + Specifies that regular expressions are enabled when searching and also for character string comparisons. This relates to the database functions, and to VLOOKUP, HLOOKUP and SEARCH. Sorry, no more switches allowed inside AVIS tags -Automatically find column and row labels -Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text. The text must consist of at least one word and must not contain any operators. - -Example: Cell E5 contains the text "Europe". Below, in cell E6, is the value 100 and in cell E7 the value 200. If the Automatically find column and row labels box is marked, you can write the following formula in cell A1: =SUM(Europe). - - +Automatically find column and row labels + Specifies that you can use the text in any cell as a label for the column below the text or the row to the right of the text. The text must consist of at least one word and must not contain any operators. + + Example: Cell E5 contains the text "Europe". Below, in cell E6, is the value 100 and in cell E7 the value 200. If the Automatically find column and row labels box is marked, you can write the following formula in cell A1: =SUM(Europe). + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp index 69f8c5eaa0..d21aa1b372 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp @@ -10,8 +10,8 @@ * * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * - * $RCSfile: 01130100.xhp,v $ - * $Revision: 1.13.4.1 $ + * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,65 +35,70 @@ - -VBA Properties -/text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp - - - -

+ + VBA Properties + /text/shared/optionen/01130100.xhp + + + +

Microsoft Office; importing/exporting VBA code -importing; Microsoft Office documents with VBA code -exporting; Microsoft Office documents with VBA code -loading; Microsoft Office documents with VBA code -saving; VBA code in Microsoft Office documents -VBA code; loading/saving documents with VBA code -Visual Basic for Applications; loading/saving documents with VBA code + importing; Microsoft Office documents with VBA code + exporting; Microsoft Office documents with VBA code + loading; Microsoft Office documents with VBA code + saving; VBA code in Microsoft Office documents + VBA code; loading/saving documents with VBA code + Visual Basic for Applications; loading/saving documents with VBA code - -VBA Properties -Specifies the general properties for loading and saving Microsoft Office documents with VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code. -

-Microsoft Word 97/2000/XP -Select the settings for Microsoft Word documents. -Help IDs got changed, but are not updated in hid.lst. So only numeric IDs here -Load Basic code -Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub. You can edit the code. When saving the document in $[officename] format, the Basic code is saved as well. When saving in another format, the Basic code from the $[officename] Basic IDE is not saved. +VBA Properties + Specifies the general properties for loading and saving Microsoft Office documents with VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code. +

+ Microsoft Word 97/2000/XP + Select the settings for Microsoft Word documents. + + + +Load Basic code + Loads and saves the Basic code from a Microsoft document as a special $[officename] Basic module with the document. The disabled Microsoft Basic code is visible in the $[officename] Basic IDE between Sub and End Sub. You can edit the code. When saving the document in $[officename] format, the Basic code is saved as well. When saving in another format, the Basic code from the $[officename] Basic IDE is not saved. - -Save original Basic code -

-Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with it in an unchanged form. -When saving in another format than Microsoft Format, the Microsoft Basic Code is not saved. For example, if the document contains Microsoft Basic Code and you save it in $[officename] format, you will be warned that the Microsoft Basic Code will not be saved. -The Save original Basic code checkbox takes precedence over the Load Basic code check box. If both boxes are marked and you edit the disabled Basic Code in the $[officename] Basic IDE, the original Microsoft Basic code will be saved when saving in the Microsoft format. A message appears to inform you of this. -To remove any possible Microsoft Basic macro viruses from the Microsoft document, unmark the Save Original Basic Code check box and save the document in Microsoft format. The document will be saved without the Microsoft Basic code. -

-Microsoft Excel 97/2000/XP -Specifies the settings for documents in Microsoft Excel. - -Load Basic code -

- -Executable code -The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run. - -Save original Basic code -

-Microsoft PowerPoint 97/2000/XP -Specifies the settings for documents in Microsoft PowerPoint. - -Load Basic code -

- -Save original Basic code -

-Setting the default file format -

- - + + + +Save original Basic code +

+ Specifies that the original Microsoft Basic code contained in the document is held in a special internal memory for as long as the document remains loaded in $[officename]. When saving the document in Microsoft format the Microsoft Basic is saved again with the code in an unchanged form. + When saving in another format than Microsoft Format, the Microsoft Basic Code is not saved. For example, if the document contains Microsoft Basic Code and you save it in $[officename] format, you will be warned that the Microsoft Basic Code will not be saved. + The Save original Basic code checkbox takes precedence over the Load Basic code check box. If both boxes are marked and you edit the disabled Basic Code in the $[officename] Basic IDE, the original Microsoft Basic code will be saved when saving in the Microsoft format. A message appears to inform you of this. + To remove any possible Microsoft Basic macro viruses from the Microsoft document, unmark the Save Original Basic Code check box and save the document in Microsoft format. The document will be saved without the Microsoft Basic code. +

+ Microsoft Excel 97/2000/XP + Specifies the settings for documents in Microsoft Excel. + Load Basic code +

+ +Executable code + The VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code will be loaded ready to be executed. If this checkbox is not checked, the VBA code will be commented out so it can be inspected, but will not run. + Save original Basic code +

+ Microsoft PowerPoint 97/2000/XP + Specifies the settings for documents in Microsoft PowerPoint. + Load Basic code +

+ Save original Basic code +

+ Setting the default file format +

+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp index 7e09e0b41e..5e99a8c484 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/01/03090000.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ This is a list of operators, functions, symbols and format options that can be inserted into the formula.

- Some examples show you the range of operations. You can find more examples in the Samples - Formulas folder of the Templates and Documents window. + Some examples show you the range of operations. The selection window is divided into two parts. Clicking a symbol at the top of the window displays its subordinate symbols in the lower half of the window. You can access the same functions in submenus through the context menu of the Commands window.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp index 66da064bd8..9e143f2345 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -74,18 +74,18 @@ - TRUE + TRUE - The condition is always met. You can also enter any value not equal to 0 as the conditional text. + The condition is always met. You can also enter any value not equal to 0 as the conditional text. - FALSE + FALSE - The condition is not met. You can also enter the value 0. + The condition is not met. You can also enter the value 0.

@@ -114,26 +114,26 @@ - x == 1 or x EQ 1 + x == 1 or x EQ 1 - The condition is true if "x" is equal to 1. + The condition is true if "x" is equal to 1. - x != 1 or x NEQ 1 + x != 1 or x NEQ 1 - The condition is true if "x" does not equal 1. + The condition is true if "x" does not equal 1. - sinx == 0 + sinx == 0 - The condition is true if "x" is a multiple of pi. + The condition is true if "x" is a multiple of pi.

@@ -142,20 +142,20 @@ - x == "ABC" or x EQ "ABC" + x == "ABC" or x EQ "ABC" - Checks if variable "x" contains (true) the "ABC" string, or not (false). + Checks if variable "x" contains (true) the "ABC" string, or not (false). - x == "" or x EQ "" - or - !x or NOT x + x == "" or x EQ "" + or + !x or NOT x - Checks if the variable "x" contains an empty string. + Checks if the variable "x" contains an empty string.

@@ -168,130 +168,130 @@ - Variable + Variable - Meaning + Meaning - user_firstname + user_firstname - First name + First name - user_lastname + user_lastname - Last name + Last name - user_initials + user_initials - Initials + Initials - user_company + user_company - Company + Company - user_street + user_street - Street + Street - user_country + user_country - Country + Country - user_zipcode + user_zipcode - Zip code + Zip code - user_city + user_city - City + City - user_title + user_title - Title + Title - user_position + user_position - Position + Position - user_tel_work + user_tel_work - Business telephone number + Business telephone number - user_tel_home + user_tel_home - Home telephone number + Home telephone number - user_fax + user_fax - Fax number + Fax number - user_email + user_email - E-mail address + E-mail address - user_state + user_state - State (not in all $[officename] versions) + State (not in all $[officename] versions)

@@ -351,13 +351,15 @@ Note the difference between the boolean NOT "!" and the comparative operator not equal "!=" (NEQ). When you refer to a database field in a condition, use the form Databasename.Tablename.Fieldname. If one of the names contains a character that is an operator, such as a minus sign (-), enclose the name in square brackets, for example, Databasename.[Table-name].Fieldname. Never use spaces inside field names.UFI: fixes bug #i25781# - but see #i25983#. Fixes also #i19571# - Example: Hiding an Empty Database Field + Example: Hiding an Empty Database Field You may want to create a condition that hides an empty field, for example, if the COMPANY field is empty for some of the data records. Select the Hidden Paragraph list entry, and type the following condition: Addressbook.Addresses.Company EQ "" or type the following NOT Addressbook.Addresses.Company If the COMPANY database field is empty, the condition is true and the paragraph is hidden. - To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, you can choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraphs check box. + To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, you can choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and enable the Fields: Hidden + paragraphs check box. Examples of Conditions in Fields The following examples use the Conditional text field, although they can be applied to any fields that can be linked to a condition. The syntax used for conditions is also used for the Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Any record or Next record fields. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp index f46ea279bf..a6f67a2a3c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/auto_off.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ Click the Custom Quotes tab - Clear the “Replace” check box(es). + Clear the "Replace" check box(es). To Stop Capitalizing the First Letter of a Sentence @@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ Click the Options tab. - Clear the “Capitalize first letter of every sentence” check box. + Clear the "Capitalize first letter of every sentence" check box. Click the Options tab. - Clear the “Apply border” check box. + Clear the "Apply border" check box.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp index 5d1d14e71c..e418f92685 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -35,63 +35,63 @@ - -Using Wildcards in Text Searches -/text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp - - - + + Using Wildcards in Text Searches + /text/swriter/guide/search_regexp.xhp + + + wildcards, see regular expressions -searching; with wildcards -regular expressions;searching -examples for regular expressions -characters;finding all -invisible characters;finding + searching; with wildcards + regular expressions;searching + examples for regular expressions + characters;finding all + invisible characters;finding mw deleted "wildcards;" and inserted wildcards crossreference Using Wildcards in Text Searches + oldref="15">Using Wildcards in Text Searches -Wildcards or placeholders can be used to search for some unspecified or even invisible characters. -You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son". - - -Choose Edit - Find & Replace. - - -Click More Options to expand the dialog. - - -Select the Regular expressions check box. - - -In the Search for box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search. - - -Click Find or Find All. - - -Regular Expression Examples - - -The wildcard for a single character is a period (.). - - -The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233". - - -The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*). - - -The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.). - - -The wildcard for a tab character is \t. - - -You can only search for regular expressions within the same paragraph. That is, you cannot search for one term in a paragraph and a different term in the next paragraph. -

-List of Wildcards -

- + Wildcards or placeholders can be used to search for some unspecified or even invisible characters. + You can use wildcards when you find and replace text in a document. For example, "s.n" finds "sun" and "son". + + + Choose Edit - Find & Replace. + + + Click More Options to expand the dialog. + + + Select the Regular expressions check box. + + + In the Search for box, type the search term and the wildcard(s) that you want to use in your search. + + + Click Find or Find All. + + + Regular Expression Examples + + + The wildcard for a single character is a period (.). + + + The wildcard for zero or more occurrences of the previous character is an asterisk. For example: "123*" finds "12" "123", and "1233". + + + The wildcard combination to search for zero or more occurrences of any character is a period and asterisk (.*). + + + The wildcard for the end of a paragraph is a dollar sign ($). The wildcard character combination for the start of a paragraph is a caret and a period (^.). + + + The wildcard for a tab character is \t. + + + A search using a regular expression will work only within one paragraph. To search using a regular expression in more than one paragraph, do a separate search in each paragraph. +

+ List of Wildcards +

+ \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp index 389dd53ce1..a321d0213e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -42,33 +42,27 @@ table mode selection - proportional distribution of tables - relative distribution of table cells - tables; adapting the width by keyboard - cells; adapting the width by keyboard - keyboard;modifying the behavior of rows/columns - behavior of rows/columns +proportional distribution of tables +relative distribution of table cells +tables; adapting the width by keyboard +cells; adapting the width by keyboard +keyboard;modifying the behavior of rows/columns +behavior of rows/columns -Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard +Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard When you insert or delete cells, rows or columns in a table, the Behavior of rows/columns options determine how the neighboring elements are affected. For example, you can only insert new rows and columns into a table with fixed row and column dimensions if space permits. - Note that these properties are valid only for changes to the column width that are made using the keyboard. Using the mouse, you are free to make any column width changes.UFI: fixes bugtraq 4971582 - To set the Behavior of rows/columns - options for tables in text documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, or use the Fixed, Fixed/Proportional, and Variable icons on the Table - Bar. There are three display modes for tables: + Note that these properties are valid only for changes to the column width that are made using the keyboard. Using the mouse, you are free to make any column width changes. + To set the Behavior of rows/columns options for tables in text documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table. There are three display modes for tables: - -Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. + Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. - -Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. + Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. - -Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases. + Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp index 1d881647ae..430bac38db 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/template_default.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -62,14 +62,13 @@ In the New Template box, type a name for the new template. - In the Categories - list, select "My Templates", and then click OK. + In the Categories list, select "My Templates", and then click OK. Choose File - Templates - Organize. - In the category list, double-click the "My Templates" folder. + In the Templates list, double-click the "My Templates" folder. Right-click the template that you created, and choose Set as Default Template. @@ -85,8 +84,7 @@ Choose File - Templates - Organize. - Right-click a folder in the category list, choose - Reset Default Template - Text Document. + Right-click a text file in any of the two lists, choose Reset Default Template - Text Document. Click Close. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp index 61b47f8df9..76bb788de3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/word_completion_adjust.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -48,41 +48,41 @@ weekdays; automatically completing months; automatically completing mw copied two entries from word_completion.xhp and created three new entries -Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents +Fine-Tuning the Word Completion for Text Documents MW created this guide by splitting word_completion.xhp -If you like it that $[officename] automatically completes the words that you frequently use, you can make further adjustments to refine that behavior. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. - To fine-tune the word completion choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion and select any of the following options: - To Insert an Additional Space Character - Select Append space. - The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. - To Define the Accept Key - Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the Accept with list box. - To Select the Minimum Number of Characters - Use the Min. word length box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. - To Select the Scope of Collected Words - Select When closing a document, save the list for later use in other documents. - Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted. - If you do not select the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. +If you like it that $[officename] automatically completes the words that you frequently use, you can make further adjustments to refine that behavior. If you want, you can also save the current list of collected words so that it can be used in the next session. + To fine-tune the word completion choose Tools – AutoCorrect Options - Word Completion and select any of the following options: + To Insert an Additional Space Character + Select Append space. + The space character is appended after you type the first character of the next word after the auto-completed word. The space character is suppressed if the next character is a delimiter, such as a full stop or a new line character. + To Define the Accept Key + Choose the key to accept the suggested word using the Accept with list box. + To Select the Minimum Number of Characters + Use the Min. word length box to set the minimum number of characters a word must have to be collected into the list. + To Select the Scope of Collected Words + Disable the option When closing a document, remove the words collected from it from the list. + Now the list is also valid for other documents that you open. When you close the last %PRODUCTNAME document, the word list is deleted. + If you enable the checkbox, the list is only valid as long as the current document is open. If you want the word list to exist longer than the current %PRODUCTNAME session, save it as a document, as described in the following section. - To Use the Word List for Further Sessions - If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. - Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature. + To Use the Word List for Further Sessions + If the automatic spellcheck option is enabled, only the words that are recognized by the spellcheck are collected. + Use the word list to always start with a defined set of technical terms for the word completion feature. - Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion. - The word completion feature collects the words. + Open the text document that contains the terms that you want to use for word completion. + The word completion feature collects the words. - Select all or some of the words in the list. + Select all or some of the words in the list. - Use Command -Ctrl+C to copy all selected words into the clipboard. Paste the clipboard into a new document and save it to get a reference list of collected words. - Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words. + Use Command +Ctrl+C to copy all selected words into the clipboard. Paste the clipboard into a new document and save it to get a reference list of collected words. + Later you can open the reference list and automatically collect the words, so that the word completion feature starts with a defined set of words.

- Word Completion + Word Completion Using Word Completion

-- cgit From c17ce7625aaff3a47958fa17f6b832bcd1018aca Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Fri, 16 Oct 2009 09:01:02 +0000 Subject: Zwischenstand --- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weekday.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp | 10 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp | 144 ++++++++++----------- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp | 6 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp | 6 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp | 5 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp | 3 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp | 8 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropadd.xhp | 5 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp | 6 +- .../shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp | 4 +- .../text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp | 2 +- .../text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp | 2 +- .../shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp | 14 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp | 115 ++++++++-------- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp | 3 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp | 3 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp | 3 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp | 5 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp | 4 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp | 2 +- .../text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp | 2 +- 128 files changed, 297 insertions(+), 321 deletions(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp index c44602ddee..1a29d297e0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000002.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ fpe: added sections and sort element

Measurement Units -In $[officename] Basic, a method parameter or a property expecting unit information can be specified either as integer or long integer expression without a unit, or as a character string containing a unit. If no unit is passed to the method the default unit defined for the active document type will be used. If the parameter is passed as a character string containing a measurement unit, the default setting will be ignored. The default measurement unit for a document type can be set under Tools - Options - (Document Type) - General. +In $[officename] Basic, a method parameter or a property expecting unit information can be specified either as integer or long integer expression without a unit, or as a character string containing a unit. If no unit is passed to the method the default unit defined for the active document type will be used. If the parameter is passed as a character string containing a measurement unit, the default setting will be ignored. The default measurement unit for a document type can be set under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - (Document Type) - General.

twips; definition diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp index 9b6555c96e..fc10dfaca9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sbasic/shared/00000003.xhp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Information

-You can set the locale used for controlling the formatting numbers, dates and currencies in $[officename] Basic in Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. In Basic format codes, the decimal point (.) is always used as placeholder for the decimal separator defined in your locale and will be replaced by the corresponding character. +You can set the locale used for controlling the formatting numbers, dates and currencies in $[officename] Basic in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. In Basic format codes, the decimal point (.) is always used as placeholder for the decimal separator defined in your locale and will be replaced by the corresponding character. The same applies to the locale settings for date, time and currency formats. The Basic format code will be interpreted and displayed according to your locale setting.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp index 376d2117ac..25380d19c5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02140600.xhp @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ Creates a date series using the defined increment and end date. AutoFill -Forms a series directly in the sheet. The AutoFill function takes account of customized lists. For example, by entering January in the first cell, the series is completed using the list defined under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. +Forms a series directly in the sheet. The AutoFill function takes account of customized lists. For example, by entering January in the first cell, the series is completed using the list defined under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. AutoFill tries to complete a value series by using a defined pattern. The series 1,3,5 is automatically completed with 7,9,11,13, and so on. Date and time series are completed accordingly; for example, after 01.01.99 and 15.01.99, an interval of 14 days is used. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp index 4a02eaeaba..5d29ae02d7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060102.xhp @@ -92,10 +92,10 @@ -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate to select the date base. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate to select the date base. When you copy and paste cells containing date values between different spreadsheets, both spreadsheet documents must be set to the same date base. If date bases differ, the displayed date values will change! Two digits years -In Tools - Options - $[officename] - General you find the area Year (two digits). This sets the period for which two-digit information applies. Note that changes made here have an effect on some of the following functions. +In %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General you find the area Year (two digits). This sets the period for which two-digit information applies. Note that changes made here have an effect on some of the following functions. When entering dates, slashes or dashes used as date separators may be interpreted as arithmetic operators. Therefore, dates entered in this format are not always recognized as dates and result in erroneous calculations. To keep dates from being interpreted as parts of formulas, place them in quotation marks, for example, "07/20/54". Functions diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp index 17b11f38d4..8e5e10a79c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/05070500.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Column and row headers Specifies whether you want the column and row headers to be printed. Grid -Prints out the borders of the individual cells as a grid. For the view on screen, make your choice under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Grid lines. +Prints out the borders of the individual cells as a grid. For the view on screen, make your choice under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Grid lines. Comments Prints the comments defined in your spreadsheet. They will be printed on a separate page, along with the corresponding cell reference. Objects/graphics diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp index 96f41f517d..6a32c0e1ba 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_date.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ DATE(Year; Month; Day) Year is an integer between 1583 and 9957 or between 0 and 99. -In Tools - Options - $[officename] - General you can set from which year a two-digit number entry is recognized as 20xx. +In %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General you can set from which year a two-digit number entry is recognized as 20xx. Month is an integer indicating the month. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weekday.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weekday.xhp index 494d2fcb00..ceb465dc34 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weekday.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/func_weekday.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Number, as a date value, is a decimal for which the weekday is to be returned. Type determines the type of calculation. For Type=1, the weekdays are counted starting from Sunday (this is the default even when the Type parameter is missing). For Type=2, the weekdays are counted starting from Monday=1. For Type=3, the weekdays are counted starting from Monday=0. -These values apply only to the standard date format that you select under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. +These values apply only to the standard date format that you select under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. Examples =WEEKDAY("2000-06-14") returns 4 (the Type parameter is missing, therefore the standard count is used. The standard count starts with Sunday as day number 1. June 14, 2000 was a Wednesday and therefore day number 4). =WEEKDAY("1996-07-24";2) returns 3 (the Type parameter is 2, therefore Monday is day number 1. July 24, 1996 was a Wednesday and therefore day number 3). diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp index 5ee42a3707..5babb060de 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/04/01020000.xhp @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ Enter (in a selected range)see i80051 -Moves the cursor down one cell in a selected range. To specify the direction that the cursor moves, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General. +Moves the cursor down one cell in a selected range. To specify the direction that the cursor moves, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General. @@ -407,7 +407,7 @@ -F11 +Command+TF11 Opens the Styles and Formatting window where you can apply a formatting style to the contents of the cell or to the current sheet. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp index 78a16972f2..c76123ce52 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/05/02140000.xhp @@ -257,7 +257,7 @@ Circular reference -Formula refers directly or indirectly to itself and the Iterations option is not set under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate.UFI: fixes #i23854# +Formula refers directly or indirectly to itself and the Iterations option is not set under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate.UFI: fixes #i23854# diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp index 776c22c5ca..e03baa41f4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/address_auto.xhp @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ In the example spreadsheet, you can use the string 'Column One' in a formula to refer to the cell range B3 to B5, or 'Column Two' for the cell range C2 to C5. You can also use 'Row One' for the cell range B3 to D3, or 'Row Two' for the cell range B4 to D4. The result of a formula that uses a cell name, for example, SUM('Column One'), is 600. - This function is active by default. To turn this function off, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate and clear the Automatically find column and row labels check box. + This function is active by default. To turn this function off, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate and clear the Automatically find column and row labels check box. If you want a name to be automatically recognized by Calc, the name must start with a letter and be composed of alphanumeric characters. If you enter the name in the formula yourself, enclose the name in single quotation marks ('). If a single quotation mark appears in a name, you must enter a backslash in front of the quotation mark, for example, 'Harry\'s Bar'.

mw changed reference to deleted Calc guide address_byname.xhp to refer to Calc guide value_with_name.xhpUFI: changed embedvar links to embed links

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp index 806acd7d59..c52cdde766 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/calc_series.xhp @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ To quickly create a list of consecutive days, enter Monday in a cell, and drag the fill handle. Hold down Command Ctrl if you do not want to fill the cells with different values. - If you select two or more adjacent cells that contain different numbers, and drag, the remaining cells are filled with the arithmetic pattern that is recognized in the numbers. The AutoFill function also recognizes customized lists that are defined under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. + If you select two or more adjacent cells that contain different numbers, and drag, the remaining cells are filled with the arithmetic pattern that is recognized in the numbers. The AutoFill function also recognizes customized lists that are defined under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. You can double-click the fill handle to automatically fill all empty columns of the current data block. For example, first enter Jan into A1 and drag the fill handle down to A12 to get the twelve months in the first column. Now enter some values into B1 and C1. Select those two cells, and double-click the fill handle. This fills automatically the data block B1:C12. Using a Defined Series diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp index 906c6e28ce..cc869dec44 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ You will see the Text Import dialog. Click OK. - If the csv file contains formulas, but you want to import the results of those formulas, then choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and clear the Formulas check box. + If the csv file contains formulas, but you want to import the results of those formulas, then choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and clear the Formulas check box. To Export Formulas and Values as CSV Files @@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ If you want to export the formulas as formulas, for example, in the form =SUM(A1:B5), proceed as follows: - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. Under Display, mark the Formulas check box. Click OK. If you want to export the calculation results instead of the formulas, do not mark Formulas. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp index b7d1544a9a..1c671892cd 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/currency_format.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ oldref="46">In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can give numbers any currency format. When you click the Currency icon

Icon - in the Formatting bar to format a number, the cell is given the default currency format set under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + in the Formatting bar to format a number, the cell is given the default currency format set under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. Exchanging of %PRODUCTNAME Calc documents can lead to misunderstandings, if your %PRODUCTNAME Calc document is loaded by a user who uses a different default currency format. In %PRODUCTNAME Calc you can define that a number that you have formatted as "1,234.50 €", still remains in euros in another country and does not become dollars. You can change the currency format in the Format Cells dialog (choose Format - Cells - Numbers tab) by two country settings. In the Language combo box select the basic setting for decimal and thousands separators. In the Format list box you can select the currency symbol and its position. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp index bac87624a7..d536fcee6d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ If you want to display the formulas in the cells, for example in the form =SUM(A1:B5), proceed as follows: -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. In the Display area mark the Formulas box. Click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp index a06b85a258..2dcf9fb6da 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/note_insert.xhp @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Format each comment by specifying background color, transparency, border style, and text alignment. Choose the commands from the context menu of the comment. -To show or hide the comment indicator, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and mark or unmark the Comment indicator check box. +To show or hide the comment indicator, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View and mark or unmark the Comment indicator check box. To display a help tip for a selected cell, use Data - Validity - Input Help. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp index de02505124..5a81a545f5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ To permanently change this everywhere -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc. Go to the Calculate page. Modify the number of Decimal places and exit the dialog with OK. @@ -85,10 +85,10 @@ To calculate with the rounded off numbers instead of the internal exact values -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc . +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc. -Go to the Calculate page. Mark the Precision as shown field and exit the dialog with OK. +Go to the Calculate page. Mark the Precision as shown field and exit the dialog with OK.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp index 19d91825f1..1cd4649303 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/sorted_list.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ Sort lists allow you to type one piece of information in a cell, then drag it to fill in a consecutive list of items. For example, enter the text "Jan" or "January" in an empty cell. Select the cell and click the mouse on the lower right corner of the cell border. Then drag the selected cell a few cells to the right or downwards. When you release the mouse button, the highlighted cells will be filled with the names of the months. Hold down Command Ctrl if you do not want to fill the cells with different values. - The predefined series can be found under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. You can also create your own lists of text strings tailored to your needs, such as a list of your company's branch offices. When you use the information in these lists later (for example, as headings), just enter the first name in the list and expand the entry by dragging it with your mouse. + The predefined series can be found under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. You can also create your own lists of text strings tailored to your needs, such as a list of your company's branch offices. When you use the information in these lists later (for example, as headings), just enter the first name in the list and expand the entry by dragging it with your mouse.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp index b0eb375903..4df7485b61 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp @@ -56,13 +56,13 @@ To permanently hide column and line headers in a table: -Under the menu item Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc, go to the View tab page. Unmark Column/row headers. Confirm with OK. +Under the menu item %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc, go to the View tab page. Unmark Column/row headers. Confirm with OK. To hide grid lines: -Under the menu item Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc +Under the menu item %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc , go to the View tab page. Unmark Grid lines. Confirm with OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp index 756b5041d4..b6ed97f815 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/year2000.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ The year in a date entry is often entered as two digits. Internally, the year is managed by $[officename] as four digits, so that in the calculation of the difference from 1/1/99 to 1/1/01, the result will correctly be two years. -Under Tools - Options - $[officename] - General you can define the century that is used when you enter a year with only two digits. The default is 1930 to 2029. +Under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General you can define the century that is used when you enter a year with only two digits. The default is 1930 to 2029. This means that if you enter a date of 1/1/30 or higher, it will be treated internally as 1/1/1930 or higher. All lower two-digit years apply to the 20xx century. So, for example, 1/1/20 is converted into 1/1/2020. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp index e05dfc7471..881ea35a3e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/04020000.xhp @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Bottom Positions the legend at the bottom of the chart. Text Orientation -This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled in Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. Text Direction Specify the text direction for a paragraph that uses complex text layout (CTL). This feature is only available if complex text layout support is enabled. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp index b708e34516..4cf6007c24 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/01/type_xy.xhp @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ For 2D charts, you can choose Insert - Y Error Bars to enable the display of error bars. You can enable the display of mean value lines and trend lines using commands on the Insert menu. Points only -Each data point is shown by an icon. %PRODUCTNAME uses default icons with different forms and colors for each data series. The default colors are set in Tools - Options - Charts - Default Colors. +Each data point is shown by an icon. %PRODUCTNAME uses default icons with different forms and colors for each data series. The default colors are set in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts - Default Colors. Lines Only This variant draws straight lines from one data point to the next. The data points are not shown by icons. The drawing order is the same as the order in the data series. Mark Sort by X Values to draw the lines in the order of the x values. This sorting applies only to the chart, not to the data in the table. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp index acb9ca6579..c5bfee3520 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/sdraw/04/01020000.xhp @@ -148,7 +148,7 @@ - F11 + Command+TF11 Opens Styles and Formatting window. @@ -345,7 +345,7 @@ Command -Ctrl-click while dragging an object. Note: you must first enable the Copy when moving option in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General to use this shortcut key. +Ctrl-click while dragging an object. Note: you must first enable the Copy when moving option in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General to use this shortcut key. Creates a copy of the dragged object when mouse button is released. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp index e56ee4b954..b4babf23ee 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000003.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Conversion of measurement units In some dialogs, you can enter measurement values into input boxes. If you just enter a numerical value, the default measurement unit is used. -You define the default measurement unit for Writer text documents in the dialog that you get by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. For Calc, Draw, and Impress, you open a document of that type and then open the appropriate General page as for Writer. +You define the default measurement unit for Writer text documents in the dialog that you get by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. For Calc, Draw, and Impress, you open a document of that type and then open the appropriate General page as for Writer. In input boxes for length units you can also add the unit abbreviation according to the following list: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp index d56be6eafa..68880d2b37 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000005.xhp @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Currently, $[officename] supports Hindi, Thai, Hebrew, and Arabic as CTL languages. - Enable CTL support using Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + Enable CTL support using %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages.

@@ -126,9 +126,9 @@ docking; definition Docking - Some windows in $[officename], for example the Styles and Formatting window and the Navigator, are "dockable" windows. You can move these windows, re-size them or dock them to an edge. On each edge you can dock several windows on top of, or alongside each other; then, by moving the border lines, you can change the relative proportions of the windows. + Some windows in $[officename], for example the Styles and Formatting window and the Navigator, are "dockable" windows. You can move these windows, re-size them or dock them to an edge. On each edge you can dock several windows on top of, or alongside each other; then, by moving the border lines, you can change the relative proportions of the windows. - To undock and re-dock, holding down the Ctrl key, double-click a vacant area in the window. In the Styles and Formatting window, you can also double-click a gray part of the window next to the icons, while you hold down the Command Ctrl key. + To undock and re-dock, holding down the CommandCtrl key, double-click a vacant area in the window. In the Styles and Formatting window, you can also double-click a gray part of the window next to the icons, while you hold down the CommandCtrl key.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp index a21f7b1d7f..9c16125b5d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000007.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@

Asian Language Support

-These commands can only be accessed after you enable support for Asian languages in Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +These commands can only be accessed after you enable support for Asian languages in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp index a9b4bb6bdb..0bc577bb47 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp @@ -89,8 +89,8 @@ With $[officename] Writer, you can insert footnotes and endnotes in your HTML document. They are exported as meta tags. The footnote and endnote characters are exported as hyperlinks. Comments are used to include unknown characters in an HTML document. Every note that begins with "HTML:..." and ends with ">" is treated as an HTML code, but is exported without these designations. Several tags around text can be included after "HTML:..." Accented characters are converted into the ANSI character set. Comments are created during import (for example, for meta tags that have no room in the file properties or unknown tags). The HTML import of $[officename] Writer is able to read files that have UTF-8 or UCS2 character coding. All characters that are contained in the ANSI character set or in the system's character set can be displayed. -When exporting to HTML, the character set selected in Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility is used. Characters not present there are written in a substitute form, which is displayed correctly in modern web browsers. When exporting such characters, you will receive an appropriate warning. -If, in Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, you select Netscape Navigator, MS Internet Explorer, or $[officename] Writer as the export option, upon export all important font attributes are exported as direct attributes (for example, text color, font size, bold, italic, and so on) in CSS1 styles. (CSS stands for Cascading Style Sheets.) Importing is also carried out according to this standard. +When exporting to HTML, the character set selected in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility is used. Characters not present there are written in a substitute form, which is displayed correctly in modern web browsers. When exporting such characters, you will receive an appropriate warning. +If, in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, you select Netscape Navigator, MS Internet Explorer, or $[officename] Writer as the export option, upon export all important font attributes are exported as direct attributes (for example, text color, font size, bold, italic, and so on) in CSS1 styles. (CSS stands for Cascading Style Sheets.) Importing is also carried out according to this standard. The "font" property corresponds to Netscape Navigator; that is, before the font size you can specify optional values for "font-style" (italic, none), "font-variant" (normal, small-caps) and "font-weight" (normal, bold). @@ -107,7 +107,7 @@ Text frames are supported with the use of CSS1 extensions for absolute positioned objects. This applies only to the export options Netscape Navigator, MS Internet Explorer, and $[officename] Writer. Text frames can be aligned as graphics, Plug-Ins, and Floating Frames, but character-linked frames are not possible. Text frames are exported as "<SPAN>" or "<DIV>" tags if they do not contain columns. If they do contain columns then they are exported as "<MULTICOL>". -The measurement unit set in $[officename] is used for HTML export of CSS1 properties. The unit can be set separately for text and HTML documents under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General or Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View. The number of exported decimal places depends on the unit. +The measurement unit set in $[officename] is used for HTML export of CSS1 properties. The unit can be set separately for text and HTML documents under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General or %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View. The number of exported decimal places depends on the unit.

@@ -176,9 +176,9 @@

-The $[officename] Web page filter supports certain capabilities of CSS2. However, to use it, print layout export must be activated in Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. Then, in HTML documents, besides the HTML Page Style, you can also use the styles "First page", "Left page" and "Right page". These styles should enable you to set different page sizes and margins for the first page and for right and left pages when printing. +The $[officename] Web page filter supports certain capabilities of CSS2. However, to use it, print layout export must be activated in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. Then, in HTML documents, besides the HTML Page Style, you can also use the styles "First page", "Left page" and "Right page". These styles should enable you to set different page sizes and margins for the first page and for right and left pages when printing. Importing and Exporting Numbering -If, in Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, the export option "$[officename] Writer" or "Internet Explorer" is selected, the indents of numberings are exported as "margin-left" CSS1 property in the STYLE attribute of the <OL> and <UL> tags. The property indicates the difference relative to the indent of the next higher level. +If, in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, the export option "$[officename] Writer" or "Internet Explorer" is selected, the indents of numberings are exported as "margin-left" CSS1 property in the STYLE attribute of the <OL> and <UL> tags. The property indicates the difference relative to the indent of the next higher level. A left paragraph indent in numbering is indicated as "margin-left" CSS1 property. First-line indents are ignored in numbering and not exported. Importing and Exporting Spreadsheet Files $[officename] imports and exports references to deleted sections such as, for example, a referenced column. The whole formula can be viewed during the export process and the deleted reference contains an indication (#REF!) to the reference. A #REF! will be correspondingly created for the reference during the import. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp index 77d406e68e..672cc7e127 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp @@ -235,7 +235,7 @@ -In OpenOffice.org 3 and StarOffice 9, you can select to save your documents using ODF 1.2 (default) or ODF 1.0/1.1 (for backward compatibility). Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General and select the ODF format version. +In OpenOffice.org 3 and StarOffice 9, you can select to save your documents using ODF 1.2 (default) or ODF 1.0/1.1 (for backward compatibility). Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and select the ODF format version. If you want to exchange documents with users that still use OpenOffice.org 1 or StarOffice 7, save the document using the respectively named filter in the File type listbox. If you want to define another file format as the default, choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General to find alternative file formats for each $[officename] document type. XML file structure @@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ The text content of the document is located in content.xml. -By default, content.xml is stored without formatting elements like indentation or line breaks to minimize the time for saving and opening the document. On the Tools - Options - Load/Save - General tab page you can activate the use of indentations and line breaks by clearing the check box Size optimization for ODF format. +By default, content.xml is stored without formatting elements like indentation or line breaks to minimize the time for saving and opening the document. On the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General tab page you can activate the use of indentations and line breaks by clearing the check box Size optimization for ODF format. The file meta.xml contains the meta information of the document, which you can enter under File - Properties. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp index 0aaabb9150..aa485a6ceb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp @@ -161,44 +161,44 @@ Options - Word Completion tab - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General

Path selection button in various wizards Click Edit button for a few entries under Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths

- Choose Tools - Options + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - General + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Memory + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Memory - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - View + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Print + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Print

-Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths Choose Edit - AutoText - Path

-Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Colors +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Colors Choose Format - Area - Colors tab

-Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Colors - Edit +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Colors - Edit Choose Format - Area - Colors tab - Edit button Choose Format - 3D Effects icon on the Illumination tab @@ -218,129 +218,129 @@

- Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Fonts + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Fonts - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Security + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Security - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Java + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Java - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Online Update + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Online Update - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Improvement Program + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Improvement Program - Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General - Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties - Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office - Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility - Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Complex Text Layout + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages - Complex Text Layout

- Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages

- Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, in the Available language modules list, select one of the language modules and then click Edit. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, in the Available language modules list, select one of the language modules and then click Edit.

- Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids

- Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Searching in Japanese + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Searching in Japanese - Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout - Choose Tools - Options - Internet + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Choose Tools - Options - Internet - Proxy + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy - Choose Tools - Options - Internet - Search + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Search - Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Compatibility + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Compatibility - Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General - Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail - Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption - Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View - Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Formatting Aids + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Formatting Aids - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Calc/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Grid + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Calc/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Grid

- Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Western) + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Western) - Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Asian) (only available if Asian language support is enabled) + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Basic Fonts (Asian) (only available if Asian language support is enabled)

- Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/ %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Print + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/ %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Print - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Table + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Table - Open a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes + Open a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes - Open an HTML document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web + Open an HTML document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Open an HTML document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Background + Open an HTML document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - Background - Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General - Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View - Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate - Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists - Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists - Copy button + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists - Copy button - Open a spreadsheet document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes + Open a spreadsheet document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes - Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - General + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - General - Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - View - Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid - Open a presentation document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Print + Open a presentation document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress/%PRODUCTNAME Draw - Print - Open a drawing document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw + Open a drawing document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Open a Math document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math + Open a Math document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math - Open a Math document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math - Settings + Open a Math document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Math - Settings - Choose Tools - Options - Charts + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts - Choose Tools - Options - Charts - Default Colors + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Charts - Default Colors - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp index 32c4ea11c9..f4162d9110 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000450.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ In a database file window of type ODBC or Address book, choose Edit - Database - Connection Type -Path selection button in various Wizards / Edit Buttons for some entries in Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths +Path selection button in various Wizards / Edit Buttons for some entries in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths In a database file window of type ODBC, choose Edit - Database - Connection Type see #i56356 diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp index c00798f2c5..0be3049b3a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040500.xhp @@ -192,7 +192,7 @@

Choose Format - Styles and Formatting - F11 key + Command+TF11 On Formatting Bar, click diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp index d6fcd04818..6dc157fbdc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00040502.xhp @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Choose Format - Object - Graphic - Area - Colors tab - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Colors tab + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Colors tab

Choose Format - Area - Transparency tab (drawing documents) diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp index 683a0af779..b3fb5b6d1d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010303.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@

Private data -Enter the contact information that you want to include on your business card. You can also modify or update these entries by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. +Enter the contact information that you want to include on your business card. You can also modify or update these entries by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data.

First name 2 Enter the first name of the person, whom you want to use as a second contact. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp index a5323cefa1..afaaac061c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01100200.xhp @@ -87,7 +87,7 @@ Apply User Data - Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + Saves the user's full name with the file. You can edit the name by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. Delete diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp index 5375df1012..a4f12aa930 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02010000.xhp @@ -56,13 +56,13 @@

-To change the number of commands that you can undo, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Memory, and enter a new value in the number of steps box. +To change the number of commands that you can undo, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Memory, and enter a new value in the number of steps box. Some commands (for example, editing Styles) cannot be undone. You can cancel the Undo command by choosing Edit - Redo. About the Undo command in database tables When you are working with database tables, you can only undo the last command. If you change the content of a record in a database table that has not been saved, and then use the Undo command, the record is erased. About the Undo command in presentations -The Undo list is cleared when you apply a new layout to a slide. +The Undo list is cleared when you apply a new layout to a slide. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp index d22517e110..12855ea811 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02020000.xhp @@ -38,10 +38,6 @@ Redo /text/shared/01/02020000.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -

@@ -52,7 +48,7 @@ Redo -Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar. +Reverses the action of the last Undo command. To select the Undo step that you want to reverse, click the arrow next to the Redo icon on the Standard bar.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp index 50fdbe184f..f1322a5f15 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04050000.xhp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Ctrl+Alt+N key combination inserts a comment anchor at the current cursor position. A comment box is shown at the page margin, where you can enter the text of your comment. A line connects anchor and comment box. In Calc, Draw, and Impress, the command Insert - Comment inserts a comment. The author name and the date and time of creating this comment is shown at the bottom of the comment box. - The comments by different authors get different colors. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data to enter your name so that it can show up as the comment author. + The comments by different authors get different colors. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data to enter your name so that it can show up as the comment author. Editing comments Every user with write permission to the document can edit and delete comments of all authors. The comment box contains an icon with a down arrow. Click the icon to open a menu with some commands to delete comments. @@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ When the cursor is inside the normal text, press the above mentioned keys to jump to the next or previous comment anchor. You can also use the small Navigation window below the vertical scrollbar to jump from one comment anchor to the next comment anchor. You can also open the Navigator to see a list of all comments. Right-click a comment name in the Navigator to edit or delete the comment. Printing comments - To set the printing options for comments in your text document, choose File - Print, then click Options. To change the printing option for comments for all your text documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + To set the printing options for comments in your text document, choose File - Print, then click Options. To change the printing option for comments for all your text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. Comments in spreadsheets When you attach a comment to a cell, a callout appears where you can enter your text. A small square in the upper right corner of a cell marks the position of a comment. To display the comment permanently, right-click the cell, and choose Show Comment. To change the object properties of a comment, for example the background color, choose Show Comment as above, then right-click the comment (do not double-click the text). diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp index 3204779f73..6bdaad5728 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/04160500.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@

-If you want to create HTML pages that use floating frames, choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML compatibility, and then select the "MS Internet Explorer" option. The floating frame is bounded by <IFRAME> and </IFRAME> tags. +If you want to create HTML pages that use floating frames, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML compatibility, and then select the "MS Internet Explorer" option. The floating frame is bounded by <IFRAME> and </IFRAME> tags.

Floating frame properties

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp index fd05be04a3..107382eeb2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020100.xhp @@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ Complex text layout font - right-to-left text direction -To enable support for complex text layout and Asian character sets, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the corresponding area. +To enable support for complex text layout and Asian character sets, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the corresponding area. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp index 52cb13c58d..8ca2f4b37c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Makes the selected characters blink. You cannot change the blink frequency. Hidden - Hides the selected characters. To display the hidden text, ensure that Non-printing Characters is selected in the View menu. You can also choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and select Hidden text. + Hides the selected characters. To display the hidden text, ensure that Non-printing Characters is selected in the View menu. You can also choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and select Hidden text. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp index 567c64a43b..5aa4c4c003 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020301.xhp @@ -671,7 +671,7 @@ Entering Dates To enter a date in a cell, use the Gregorian calendar format. For example, in an English locale, enter 1/2/2002 for Jan 2, 2002. -All date formats are dependent on the locale that is set in Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. For example, if your locale is set to 'Japanese', then the Gengou calendar is used. The default date format in %PRODUCTNAME uses the Gregorian Calendar. +All date formats are dependent on the locale that is set in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. For example, if your locale is set to 'Japanese', then the Gengou calendar is used. The default date format in %PRODUCTNAME uses the Gregorian Calendar. To specify a calendar format that is independent of the locale, add a modifier in front of the date format. For example, to display a date using the Jewish calendar format in a non-Hebrew locale, enter: [~jewish]DD/MM/YYYY.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp index 1a4145d727..97105ab067 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ paragraphs; Asian typography typography; Asian MW changed "formats;" to "formatting;"Asian Typography -Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area. The Asian typography options are ignored in HTML documents. +Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area. The Asian typography options are ignored in HTML documents.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp index d97976ba2c..a8fe4be2a5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05030100.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ Indents and Spacing Sets the indenting and the spacing options for the paragraph.

- To change the measurement units used in this dialog, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. + To change the measurement units used in this dialog, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp index ecb63b58b6..4c5a8cb3e4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06010600.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Chinese Translation -Translates the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is translated. You can only use this command if you enable Asian language support in Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Translates the selected Chinese text from one Chinese writing system to the other. If no text is selected, the entire document is translated. You can only use this command if you enable Asian language support in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp index 5dcbc78cba..7f210d17fe 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06150120.xhp @@ -72,6 +72,6 @@ If this is an import filter, enter the file name of the XSLT stylesheet that you want to use for importing. Template for import Enter the name of the template that you want to use for importing. In the template, styles are defined to display XML tags. - The path to the directory that contains the template must be included in Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. When you open an XML file whose filter uses the template, the template opens first. In the template, you can map $[officename] styles to display XML tags in the XML document. + The path to the directory that contains the template must be included in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. When you open an XML file whose filter uses the template, the template opens first. In the template, you can map $[officename] styles to display XML tags in the XML document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp index 1e694fea5a..dbbd91c77c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/06200000.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ Hangul/Hanja Conversion -Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul. The menu command can only be called if you enable Asian language support under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and if a text formatted in Korean language is selected. +Converts the selected Korean text from Hangul to Hanja or from Hanja to Hangul. The menu command can only be called if you enable Asian language support under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and if a text formatted in Korean language is selected.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp index 9bd1feeda9..f6d883cc12 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/about_meta_tags.xhp @@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ When you import an HTML document, following META tags are automatically converted to $[officename] fields: <META HTTP-EQUIV="REFRESH"...> and <META NAME="..." ...> , where NAME equals to AUTHOR, CREATED, CHANGED, CHANGEDBY, DESCRIPTION, KEYWORDS or CLASSIFICATION. Scripts, comments, and META tags that are positioned directly before a TABLE tag are inserted in the first cell of the table. Scripts and META tags in the header of an HTML document are imported and anchored to the first paragraph in the document. -To set the options for importing HTML tags, choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. A known META tag contains either "HTTP-EQUIV" or "NAME", and are imported as $[officename] comments. The only exception is <META NAME="GENERATOR"...>, which is ignored. +To set the options for importing HTML tags, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. A known META tag contains either "HTTP-EQUIV" or "NAME", and are imported as $[officename] comments. The only exception is <META NAME="GENERATOR"...>, which is ignored. Export Tips Comments and script fields at the beginning of the first paragraph in a document are exported to the header of an HTML document. If the document begins with a table, the first paragraph in the first cell of the table is exported to the header of the HTML document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp index d56720daa0..dc1ec6034b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/grid.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Automatically aligns objects to vertical and horizontal grid lines. To override this feature, hold down the Command keyCtrl key when you drag an object.UFI: copied from shared\optionen\01050100.xhpUFI removed GridFront help idGrid to Front Displays the grid lines in front of the objects on the slide or page.

-Set the grid color on Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance. +Set the grid color on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp index 96bbda6e87..b2ef7c3658 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ The Media Player supports many different media formats. You can also insert media files from the Media Player into your document.UFI: add a list of keyboard shortcuts to /04/ file when available -On Linux or Solaris systems, the Media Player requires the Java Media Framework API (JMF). Download and install the JMF files from http://java.sun.com/javase/technologies/desktop/media/jmf/index.jsp and add the path to the installed jmf.jar to the class path in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java. +On Linux or Solaris systems, the Media Player requires the Java Media Framework API (JMF). Download and install the JMF files from http://java.sun.com/javase/technologies/desktop/media/jmf/index.jsp and add the path to the installed jmf.jar to the class path in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java. On Windows systems, the Media Player uses DirectShow, which should be installed on your system by default. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp index 16f167c6dd..85290b0b35 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ You can check for updates manually or automatically. Checking for updates will also look for updates of all installed extensions. Choose Help - Check for Updates to check manually. - You can disable or enable the automatic check in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update. + You can disable or enable the automatic check in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update. If an update is available, an icon @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. - If you need a proxy server, enter the proxy settings in Tools - Options - Internet - Proxy. + If you need a proxy server, enter the proxy settings in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. Choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp index e0a8bb8e59..8e15c1d231 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp @@ -46,7 +46,7 @@ Check for UpdatesUFI: this is the dialogChecks for available updates to your version of %PRODUCTNAME. If a newer version is available, you can choose to download the update. After downloading, if you have write permissions for the installation directory, you can install the update. Once the download starts, you see a progress bar and three buttons on the dialog. You can pause and resume the download by clicking the Pause and Resume buttons. Click Cancel to abort the download and delete the partly downloaded file. -By default, downloads will be stored to your desktop. You can change the folder where the downloaded file will be stored in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update. +By default, downloads will be stored to your desktop. You can change the folder where the downloaded file will be stored in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update. After the download is complete, you can click Install to start the installation of the update. You see a confirmation dialog, where you can choose to close %PRODUCTNAME. Under some operation systems, it may be required to manually go to the download folder, unzip the download file, and start the setup script. After installation of the update you can delete the download file to save space.Download diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp index 1a632f39ff..176ca62e50 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/webhtml.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@

-The HTML formatted copy is written to the temporary files folder that you can select in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. When you quit %PRODUCTNAME, the HTML file will be deleted. -You can set the HTML export filter options by choosing Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. +The HTML formatted copy is written to the temporary files folder that you can select in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. When you quit %PRODUCTNAME, the HTML file will be deleted. +You can set the HTML export filter options by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp index 0932ade91b..be8b685c1a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp @@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ XML Form documents (XForms) use the same controls. To create a form, open a document and use the Form Controls toolbar to add and define the form controls. If you want, you can also link the form to a database, so that you can use the controls to manipulate a database. When you create a form in an HTML document, you can use the form to send data over the Internet. -%PRODUCTNAME only exports the form properties that are supported by the HTML version that you export to. To specify the HTML version, choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. +%PRODUCTNAME only exports the form properties that are supported by the HTML version that you export to. To specify the HTML version, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility. To add a control to a document diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp index 7d98745f6b..e22f0e1953 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ date fields; propertiesSpecial Tips for Date Fields - When you enter a year using two digits, the corresponding four digit value is determined by a setting in Tools - Options - $[officename] - General. For example, if 1935 is set as the lower limiting value and you enter 34 as a date value, then the result is 2034 instead of 1934. + When you enter a year using two digits, the corresponding four digit value is determined by a setting in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General. For example, if 1935 is set as the lower limiting value and you enter 34 as a date value, then the result is 2034 instead of 1934. The pre-set limit value will be saved for each document. If you want to open a document in an older version of StarOffice, in which the limit of 1930 could not be changed, then you must also select the limit value 1930 in your current version of $[officename].

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp index c798dee171..dbc69fef91 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ You can enter several fonts, separated by semicolons. $[officename] uses each named font in succession if the previous fonts are not available.

Any font changes apply to the selected text or word in which the cursor is positioned. If no text has been selected, the font applies to text typed afterwards. - The last five font names that have been selected are shown in the top part of the combo box, if you have marked the Font history field in Tools - Options - $[officename] - View. As soon as you close your document, the normal alphabetic numbering of the installed fonts will be recreated. + The last five font names that have been selected are shown in the top part of the combo box, if you have marked the Font history field in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View. As soon as you close your document, the normal alphabetic numbering of the installed fonts will be recreated.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp index 15eb8adf11..627aa85d26 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/04/01010000.xhp @@ -224,8 +224,7 @@ - Command -Ctrl+M + ControlCtrl+M Removes direct formatting from selected text or objects (as in Format - Default Formatting) @@ -375,8 +374,7 @@ - Command -Ctrl+Y + Command+Shift+ZCtrl+Y Redoes last action. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp index 7bc523b0cb..2f0c438f0b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/05/00000120.xhp @@ -57,14 +57,14 @@ DEDR: Reviewed The Help Agent The Help Agent starts automatically when you are performing a task that might require some assistance. The Help Agent appears in a small window in a corner of the document. To view the help for the task, click inside the Help Agent window. The Help Agent automatically closes after a short delay. If you ignore or close the Help Agent three times you perform a certain task, the Help Agent no longer opens for that task. -Enable or disable the Help Agent on Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. +Enable or disable the Help Agent on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. Tips Tips provide you with the names of toolbar buttons. To display a tip, rest the pointer over a toolbar button until the name of the button appears. Tips are also displayed for some elements in a document, such as chapter names when you scroll through a long document. -Enable or disable the tips on Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. +Enable or disable the tips on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. Extended Tips Extended tips provide a brief description about buttons and commands. To display an extended tip, press Shift+F1, then point to a button or command. -If you always want extended tips instead of tips, enable the extended tips on Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. +If you always want extended tips instead of tips, enable the extended tips on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp index 6f8bedd9dd..94808b2a6d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/02010100.xhp @@ -165,8 +165,7 @@ Here you can enter one additional criterion for filtering in each line. Multiple criteria in one column will be connected by an OR link. You can also use the context menu of the line headers in the lower area of the query design to insert another line for functions: Functions - -Select a function to run in the query here. The functions you can run here depend on the database. +Select a function to run in the query here. The functions you can run here depend on the database. If you are working with the HSQL database, the list box in the Function row offers you the following options:

@@ -258,8 +257,6 @@

- - You can also enter function calls directly into the SQL statement. The syntax is: SELECT FUNCTION(column) FROM table. For example, the function call in SQL for calculating a sum is: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp index 3a4584273f..e5fdaf3cca 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/05030100.xhp @@ -65,8 +65,7 @@ primary keys; defining Create primary key - Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values.You should use this field if you copy a dBASE table to the Adabas format, since in the Adabas format a primary key must always be available in order to edit the table. - +Automatically generates a primary key data field and fills it with values. You should always use this field, since a primary key must always be available in order to edit the table. Name Specifies a name for the primary key generated. This name is optional. Next page diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp index 194cbc1abb..e342a04932 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/30000000.xhp @@ -44,11 +44,9 @@ Adabas D Database -Adabas D by Software AG is installed when you install the commercial office software by Sun Microsystems, Inc. -If you are using OpenOffice.org software, the Adabas D software package can be downloaded and installed separately (see www.adabas.com). -The Adabas D database that you may have installed together with $[officename] is a limited version of the database. For more information on Adabas, visit the Software AG Web site at http://www.softwareag.com/adabas/. +The Adabas D software package can be downloaded and installed separately (see www.adabas.com). About Adabas -The Adabas database that you may have installed together with $[officename] is restricted to a size of 100 MB, and a maximum of three users on a network. See the "License.txt" file in the Adabas directory for more details. The Adabas database must be installed in a separate directory from $[officename]. +The free available Adabas database is restricted to a size of 100 MB, and a maximum of three users on a network. See the "License.txt" file in the Adabas directory for more details. The Adabas database must be installed in a separate directory from $[officename]. The name of an Adabas file cannot exceed 8 characters. The path to the Adabas file, including the file name, cannot exceed 30 characters, and must be compliant with the 7-bit ASCII code. Both the path and the file name cannot contain spaces. Under Windows, the Adabas setup application adds the DBROOT environment variable that contains the path information for the database. If the setup application finds this variable, it does not install the database. Create New Adabas Database @@ -65,7 +63,7 @@ Deleting an Adabas Database -To delete the reference to an Adabas database, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. Select the database, and then click Delete. +To delete the reference to an Adabas database, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. Select the database, and then click Delete. To delete an Adabas database: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropadd.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropadd.xhp index 4880d01ebc..08610b7580 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropadd.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropadd.xhp @@ -76,8 +76,7 @@ To view changes that you make to the database, close the connection to the database, and then reconnect to the database. IndexesUFI: seen for dBase Opens the Indexes dialog, where you can organize the table indexes in the current dBASE database.UFI: removed link from extended help text - -UFI: Commercial means AdabasData buffer size (MB) +Data buffer size (MB) Enter the size of the data buffer for the database. The setting takes effect after you restart the database.copied from shared\explorer\database\11170000.xhp Data increment (MB) Enter the size by which you want to automatically increment the database. The maximum increment size is 100 MB. The setting takes effect after you restart the database. @@ -89,8 +88,6 @@ Exits the Adabas database server when you exit $[officename]. This option is only available if you start the database server from $[officename] with a control user and password. Extended Opens the Database Statistics dialog, where you can view statistics about the Adabas database. - - Text contains headersUFI: the following found for a text file folder, but HELP Ids are somewhere else Select this check box if the first line of the text file contains field names.copied from shared\explorer\database\11040000.xhp Field separator diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp index 19a732b0b3..b16b97effd 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabapropgen.xhp @@ -88,9 +88,5 @@ Tests the database connection through the JDBC driver class. Choose a database Select a database from the list or click Create to create a new database. - -Create -Opens the Create New Adabas D Database dialog. - - + diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp index 3c78b6b1d6..62dc482ef6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/dabawiz02jdbc.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ JDBC Examples You can use a JDBC driver class to connect to a JDBC database from %PRODUCTNAME. The driver class is provided by the database manufacturer. Two examples of JDBC databases are Oracle and MySQL. -The driver classes must be added to %PRODUCTNAME in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java.UFI: #i38525# +The driver classes must be added to %PRODUCTNAME in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java.UFI: #i38525# Oracle database You can use a JDBC driver to access an Oracle database from Solaris or Linux. To access the database from Windows, you need an ODBC driver. @@ -96,7 +96,7 @@ JDBC Driver Class Enter the name of the JDBC driver.

-Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME +Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java, and click the Class Path button. After you add the path information, restart %PRODUCTNAME.

Test ClassUFI: may be Test Connection - both strings are in spec diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp index e98a063af7..0e8add313f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/explorer/database/rep_main.xhp @@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ The Report Builder requires an installed Java Runtime Environment (JRE). - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java. Wait up to one minute, while %PRODUCTNAME collects information on installed Java software on your system. @@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Ensure that Use a Java runtime environment is enabled. - If no JRE version is found on your system, open your web browser and download the JRE software from http://www.java.com. Install the JRE software. Then restart %PRODUCTNAME and open Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java again. + If no JRE version is found on your system, open your web browser and download the JRE software from http://www.java.com. Install the JRE software. Then restart %PRODUCTNAME and open %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java again. To open the Report Builder diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp index 8e7a282fc3..8386b205a7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Zooming of on-screen user interface for menus, icons, and documents - The user interface is scalable through your Window Manageroperating system settings. The default font size for dialogs is 12pt, corresponding to a scale of 100%. You can also change the font size for dialogs in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View. The zoom factor of a document can be changed in View - Zoom, or by double-clicking the zoom factor displayed in the Status Bar. + The user interface is scalable through your Window Manageroperating system settings. The default font size for dialogs is 12pt, corresponding to a scale of 100%. You can also change the font size for dialogs in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View. The zoom factor of a document can be changed in View - Zoom, or by double-clicking the zoom factor displayed in the Status Bar. Please note that accessibility support relies on Sun Microsystems Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools. This means that the first program startup may take a few seconds longer, because the Java runtime environment has to be started as well. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp index 13c0439eed..d883000689 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/active_help_on_off.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ To turn Extended Tips on and off: -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General, and check Extended tips. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General, and check Extended tips. A check mark indicates that the extended tips are activated. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp index 928c7664c8..386f9e6a8e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Enable to share the current document with other users. Disable to use the document unshared. This will invalidate the not yet saved edits that other users applied in the time since you last opened or saved this document. Collaboration in Calc - In %PRODUCTNAME Calc, document sharing allows simultaneous write access for many users. Every user who wants to collaborate should enter a name on the Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data tab page. + In %PRODUCTNAME Calc, document sharing allows simultaneous write access for many users. Every user who wants to collaborate should enter a name on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data tab page. Some commands are not available (grayed out) when change tracking or document sharing is activated. For a new spreadsheet you cannot apply or insert the grayed out elements. Spec Doc owner told me that this is work in progress and may change any time Creating a new spreadsheet User A creates a new spreadsheet document. The following conditions can apply: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp index f98667aeb4..dc1ab1d09b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ If the Always create backup copy option is selected, the old version of the file is saved to the backup directory whenever you save the current version of the file. -You can change the backup directory by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, then change the Backups path in the dialog. +You can change the backup directory by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, then change the Backups path in the dialog. The backup copy has the same name as the document, but the extension is .BAK. If the backup folder already contains such a file, it will be overwritten without warning. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp index 745b7ebecf..b244b7e5ba 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_open.xhp @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ To restrict the display of files in the Open dialog to a certain type select the corresponding File type from the list. Select All Files (*.*) to display all files. Cursor Position In general, all documents open with the cursor at the start of the document. -One exception appears when the author of a Writer text document saves and reopens a document: The cursor will be at the same position where it has been when the document was saved. This only works when the name of the author was entered in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data. +One exception appears when the author of a Writer text document saves and reopens a document: The cursor will be at the same position where it has been when the document was saved. This only works when the name of the author was entered in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User Data. Press Shift+F5 to set the cursor to the last saved position. @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ On most operating systems, you can choose to use the system file dialogs or %PRODUCTNAME dialogs. -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General to switch the type of open/save dialogs. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General to switch the type of open/save dialogs. The %PRODUCTNAME dialogs support file download and upload using secure https connections. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp index 32f416c834..ff7cb4e1ae 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Enter a name in the File name box and click Save. -If you want the file dialogs to offer another file format as default, select that format in Tools - Options - Load/Save - General in the Default file format area. +If you want the file dialogs to offer another file format as default, select that format in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General in the Default file format area.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp index b01bc6ebdc..642460bbd6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/flat_icons.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ checked -yj You can change the icon view between small and large icons. -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename]. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename]. On the View tab page, select the Toolbar icon size. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp index f10a2fcbb1..2a04b8347a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General and specify in the Save URLs relative to field if $[officename] creates relative or absolute hyperlinks. Relative linking is only possible when the document you are working on and the link destination are on the same drive. -You should create the same directory structure on your hard disk as that which exists in the web space hosted by your Internet provider. Call the root directory for the homepage on your hard disk "homepage", for example. The start file is then "index.html", the full path being "C:\homepage\index.html" (assuming Windows operating system). The URL on your Internet provider's server might then be as follows: "http://www.myprovider.com/mypage/index.html". With relative addressing, you indicate the link relative to the location of the output document. For example, if you placed all the graphics for your homepage in a subfolder called "C:\homepage\images", you would need to give the following path to access the graphic "picture.gif": "images\picture.gif". This is the relative path, starting from the location of the file "index.html". On the provider's server, you would place the picture in the folder "mypage/images". When you transfer the document "index.html" to the provider's server through the File - Save As dialog, and if you have marked the option Copy local graphics to Internet under Tools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, $[officename] will automatically copy the graphic to the correct directory on the server. +You should create the same directory structure on your hard disk as that which exists in the web space hosted by your Internet provider. Call the root directory for the homepage on your hard disk "homepage", for example. The start file is then "index.html", the full path being "C:\homepage\index.html" (assuming Windows operating system). The URL on your Internet provider's server might then be as follows: "http://www.myprovider.com/mypage/index.html". With relative addressing, you indicate the link relative to the location of the output document. For example, if you placed all the graphics for your homepage in a subfolder called "C:\homepage\images", you would need to give the following path to access the graphic "picture.gif": "images\picture.gif". This is the relative path, starting from the location of the file "index.html". On the provider's server, you would place the picture in the folder "mypage/images". When you transfer the document "index.html" to the provider's server through the File - Save As dialog, and if you have marked the option Copy local graphics to Internet under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, $[officename] will automatically copy the graphic to the correct directory on the server. An absolute path such as "C:\homepage\graphics\picture.gif" would no longer function on the provider server. Neither a server nor the computer of a reader needs to have a C hard drive: operating systems such as Unix or MacOS do not recognize drive letters, and even if the folder homepage\graphics existed, your picture would not be available. It is better to use relative addressing for file links. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp index b4204c518e..8f5d9fb7cc 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/imagemap.xhp @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Use the icons in the ImageMap Editor to draw a hotspot shape, for example a rectangle, over the image at the background. - You can see an extended help text on the functions of each icon when you enable Extended Help in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. + You can see an extended help text on the functions of each icon when you enable Extended Help in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. Enter the "Address" URL that will be shown in a Web browser when the user clicks the hotspot. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp index e61306daf5..e4b07cee04 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/import_ms.xhp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Select a file name and click Open. -If you always want the file dialogs to show another format by default, choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General and select that format as Default file format. +If you always want the file dialogs to show another format by default, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and select that format as Default file format. Converting all documents of a folder Open the wizard, which guides you through the operation, to copy and convert all documents from Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel or Microsoft PowerPoint into OpenDocument file format documents. You can select a source and target directory, specify whether to convert documents and/or templates, and more besides. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp index b96480ce25..e266af1ca9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/keyboard.xhp @@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Use the arrow keys to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. - Set the grid resolution unit with Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid in the Resolution area. If you enter a number greater than 1 in the Subdivision area, you must press the arrow key as often as the number states to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. + Set the grid resolution unit with %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid in the Resolution area. If you enter a number greater than 1 in the Subdivision area, you must press the arrow key as often as the number states to move the selected object by one grid resolution unit. Use the Option diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp index 098ffc45c1..2e5b906d50 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Selecting a language for the whole document - Choose Tools - Options. Go to Language Settings - Languages. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options. Go to Language Settings - Languages. Under Default languages for documents, select the document language for all newly created documents. If you mark For the current document only, your choice will only apply to the current document. Close the dialog with OK. @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Most users download the American English version, which gives you English menu commands and English application help. If you want another language for the menus (and for the application help, if available in that language), change the UI language as follows. - Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. Select another UI language in the "User interface" listbox. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp index e0abf3e302..f8ea0a0e1a 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp @@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ Open a document of the type for which you want to change the measurement units. -Choose Tools - Options. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options. In the left pane of the dialog, double-click the application for which you want to select the measurement unit. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp index f230251017..c5ccc9a5e6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ About Converting Microsoft Office Documents $[officename] can automatically open Microsoft Office 97/2000/XP documents. However, some layout features and formatting attributes in more complex Microsoft Office documents are handled differently in $[officename] or are unsupported. As a result, converted files require some degree of manual reformatting. The amount of reformatting that can be expected is proportional to the complexity of the structure and formatting of the source document. $[officename] cannot run Visual Basic Scripts, but can load them for you to analyze. -The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can load, but not save, the Microsoft Office Open XML document formats with the extensions docx, xlsx, and pptx. The same versions can also run some Excel Visual Basic scripts, if you enable this feature at Tools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. +The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can load, but not save, the Microsoft Office Open XML document formats with the extensions docx, xlsx, and pptx. The same versions can also run some Excel Visual Basic scripts, if you enable this feature at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. The following lists provide a general overview of Microsoft Office features that may cause conversion challenges. These will not affect your ability to use or work with the content of the converted document. Microsoft Word diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp index 0ba1818bd2..6e77f75d76 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp @@ -125,7 +125,7 @@ Macros in Microsoft Office and $[officename] With a few exceptions, Microsoft Office and $[officename] cannot run the same macro code. Microsoft Office uses VBA (Visual Basic for Applications) code, and $[officename] uses Basic code based on the $[officename] API (Application Program Interface) environment. Although the programming language is the same, the objects and methods are different. -The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can run some Excel Visual Basic scripts if you enable this feature at Tools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. +The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can run some Excel Visual Basic scripts if you enable this feature at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. If you use macros in one of the applications and want to use the same functionality in the other application, you must edit the macros. $[officename] can load the macros that are contained within Microsoft Office files and you can then view and edit the macro code in the $[officename] Basic IDE editor. You can choose to preserve or delete VBA macros Open a Microsoft Office document that contains VBA macro code. Change only the normal contents (text, cells, graphics), and do not edit the macros. Save the document as a Microsoft Office file type. Open the file in Microsoft Office, and the VBA macros will run as before. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp index 6a430cb51f..d0316f3bdf 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp @@ -69,15 +69,7 @@ Printing in black and white in %PRODUCTNAME Impress and %PRODUCTNAME Draw -Choose Tools - Options - - -%PRODUCTNAME - - Impress or Tools - Options - - -%PRODUCTNAME - - Draw, as appropriate. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impressor %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw, as appropriate. Then choose Print. @@ -96,11 +88,11 @@ Printing all text documents with black and white text -Choose Tools - Options - +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Writer or Tools - Options - + Writer or %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp index 6ae84df1a2..154cec9f17 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_faster.xhp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@ You can decide to reduce the data necessary to print your document. The settings can be defined differently for printing directly to the printer or for printing to a file. -Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Print. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Print. Click one of the following settings options: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp index ba20ac7a54..0dbea570e8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/redlining_enter.xhp @@ -85,7 +85,7 @@ You can enter a comment on each recorded change by placing the cursor in the area of the change and then choosing Edit - Changes - Comment. In addition to Extended Tips, the comment is also displayed in the list in the Accept or Reject Changes dialog. To stop recording changes, choose Edit - Changes - Record again. The check mark is removed and you can now save the document. In a text document, you can highlight all lines that you have changed with an additional colored marking. This can be in the form of a red line in the margin, for example. -To change the settings for tracking changes, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes or on the Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes. +To change the settings for tracking changes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes or on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp index bfcb8a69a3..7e25049336 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp @@ -207,7 +207,7 @@ You can now send faxes by printing to the printer that has just been created. Enter the fax number as text in the document. You can also enter a field that takes the fax number from your active database. In any case, the fax number must start with the characters @@# and end with @@. A valid entry would have the form @@#1234567@@. If these characters including the telephone number are not printed, activate the Fax number is removed from the printout option under Properties on the Command tab page. If no telephone number is entered in the document, a dialog prompting you for it will appear after the printout. -In $[officename] you can also activate an icon for sending faxes to a default fax. To do this, choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars, click Add Commands and add from "Documents" the Send Default Fax icon. You can set which fax is used when this button is pressed under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. +In $[officename] you can also activate an icon for sending faxes to a default fax. To do this, choose Tools - Customize - Toolbars, click Add Commands and add from "Documents" the Send Default Fax icon. You can set which fax is used when this button is pressed under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. Remember to create one separate print job for each fax, otherwise, the first recipient will receive all the faxes. In the Tools - Mail Merge dialog select the Printer option and then select the Single print jobs check box. Connecting a PostScript to PDF Converter diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp index fc267590f9..125819ac2d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/standard_template.xhp @@ -72,7 +72,7 @@ Choose File - Templates - Organize. -Double-click My Templates in the list on the left. You will see the user-defined templates in the user directory specified under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. Select the template you have just saved and open the context menu or open the submenu of the Commands button. +Double-click My Templates in the list on the left. You will see the user-defined templates in the user directory specified under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. Select the template you have just saved and open the context menu or open the submenu of the Commands button. Choose Set As Default Template. The next time you open a new text document, the new document will be based on the new default template. @@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Using Custom Templates There are several ways to make your work easier by using your own custom templates. Templates in the Template Folder -You can save a new template with File - Templates - Save or by selecting "Template" file type in any Save dialog. Save the template in the user directory specified under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths to be able to access the template from within the File - New - From Templates and Documents dialog. +You can save a new template with File - Templates - Save or by selecting "Template" file type in any Save dialog. Save the template in the user directory specified under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths to be able to access the template from within the File - New - From Templates and Documents dialog. You may need to update the view of the templates in the dialog before you can see a newly created template. In this case, choose File - Templates - Organize and in the submenu of the Commands button, choose Update. To open the template for editing, choose File - Templates - Edit.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp index 942c37de11..8e588d8ff2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp @@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ FPE: Deleted screenshot. On the horizontal ruler you can see the tab stops for the current paragraph. If you want to change the tab stops, you should first consider the scope to which you want to change tab stops as follows: -Change the default tab stops for all documents: Use the menu Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. +Change the default tab stops for all documents: Use the menu %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. Change the tab stops for all paragraphs using the current Paragraph Style: Right-click the paragraph to open the context menu, choose Edit Paragraph Style, click Tabs. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp index 85ee67bb38..aecbc43424 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/workfolder.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ When you start a dialog to open or save a document, $[officename] initially displays your working directory. To change this directory: - Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. Click My Documents and click the Edit button, or double-click on My Documents. @@ -63,7 +63,7 @@ In the Select Path dialog, choose the working directory you want and click Select. - You also use this procedure to change the directory displayed by $[officename] when you want to insert a graphic. Choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - Graphics, then follow step 3. + You also use this procedure to change the directory displayed by $[officename] when you want to insert a graphic. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - Graphics, then follow step 3.

Paths diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp index 4a25d2414e..75ae5eaf17 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Shows information on how to get support.

Check for Updates -Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. If you need a Proxy, check the %PRODUCTNAME Proxy settings in Tools - Options - Internet. Then choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite. +Enable an Internet connection for %PRODUCTNAME. If you need a Proxy, check the %PRODUCTNAME Proxy settings in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet. Then choose Check for Updates to check for the availability of a newer version of your office suite. This menu command is visible for the evaluation version of %PRODUCTNAME. Choose to open the Purchase %PRODUCTNAME Wizard.UFI: see spec doc "Unlocking_Evalversion_as_Fullversion.sxw" by BHremoved switch, changed to invisible help text About $[officename] diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp index b6c66f3997..2b85356a47 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Activate Java platform support by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - Java. -Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- Java, and click the Class Path button. After you add the path information, restart %PRODUCTNAME. -Your modifications at the Tools - Options - $[officename] - Java tab page will be used even if the Java Virtual Machine (JVM, a virtual machine for the Java platform) already has been started. After modifications to the ClassPath you must restart $[officename]. The same is true for modifications under Tools - Options - Internet - Proxy. Only the two boxes "Http Proxy" and "Ftp Proxy" and their ports don't require a restart, they will be evaluated when you click OK. +Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- Java, and click the Class Path button. After you add the path information, restart %PRODUCTNAME. +Your modifications at the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Java tab page will be used even if the Java Virtual Machine (JVM, a virtual machine for the Java platform) already has been started. After modifications to the ClassPath you must restart $[officename]. The same is true for modifications under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. Only the two boxes "Http Proxy" and "Ftp Proxy" and their ports don't require a restart, they will be evaluated when you click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp index bf1eb94c7f..08b307cff1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp @@ -1,8 +1,8 @@ - - + + + - - -Options -/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp - - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - -

+ + Options + /text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp + + + +

options; tools -defaults; program configuration -settings; program configuration + defaults; program configuration + settings; program configuration mw changed "settings;options" and "defaults;..." -Options -This command opens a dialog for a customized program configuration. -

-All your settings are saved automatically. To expand an entry either double click this entry or click the plus sign. To collapse the entry, click the minus sign or double click the entry. -You see only the entries that are applicable to the current document. If the current document is a text document, you see the %PRODUCTNAME Writer entry, and so on for all modules of %PRODUCTNAME. %PRODUCTNAME Impress and %PRODUCTNAME Draw are treated as the same in this dialog. The common entries are always visible. +Options + This command opens a dialog for a customized program configuration. +

+ All your settings are saved automatically. To expand an entry either double click this entry or click the plus sign. To collapse the entry, click the minus sign or double click the entry. + You see only the entries that are applicable to the current document. If the current document is a text document, you see the %PRODUCTNAME Writer entry, and so on for all modules of %PRODUCTNAME. %PRODUCTNAME Impress and %PRODUCTNAME Draw are treated as the same in this dialog. The common entries are always visible. -Select an entry to edit. -

-%PRODUCTNAME -

-Load/Save -

-Language Settings -

-Internet -

-%PRODUCTNAME Writer -

-%PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web -

-%PRODUCTNAME Calc -

-%PRODUCTNAME Impress -

-%PRODUCTNAME Draw -

-%PRODUCTNAME Math -

-Charts -

-%PRODUCTNAME Database -

- - +Select an entry to edit. +

+ Note for Mac OS X users: The Help mentions the menu path Tools - Options at numerous places. Replace this path with %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences on your Mac OS X main menu. +

+ %PRODUCTNAME +

+ Load/Save +

+ Language Settings +

+ Internet +

+ %PRODUCTNAME Writer +

+ %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web +

+ %PRODUCTNAME Calc +

+ %PRODUCTNAME Impress +

+ %PRODUCTNAME Draw +

+ %PRODUCTNAME Math +

+ Charts +

+ %PRODUCTNAME Database +

+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp index 5af76c2f36..9837e84f6c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp @@ -96,8 +96,7 @@ Always create backup copy Saves the previous version of a document as a backup copy whenever you save a document. Every time %PRODUCTNAME creates a backup copy, the previous backup copy is replaced. The backup copy gets the extension .BAK. - To change the location of the backup copy, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - - Paths, and then enter a new path for the backup file. + To change the location of the backup copy, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths, and then enter a new path for the backup file. Save AutoRecovery information everyUFI: see http://specs.openoffice.org/appwide/recovery/Autorecovery.sxwUFI: write guide "Auto backup and recovery" diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp index ed4aee9c79..e16dc7b230 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040000.xhp @@ -58,10 +58,10 @@ Basic Fonts (Western) Specifies the settings for the basic fonts. Basic Fonts (Asian) -Specifies the settings for the basic Asian fonts if Asian language support has been activated under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Specifies the settings for the basic Asian fonts if Asian language support has been activated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. Basic Fonts (CTL) -Specifies the settings for basic fonts for complex text layout languages if their support has been activated under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Specifies the settings for basic fonts for complex text layout languages if their support has been activated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp index 9706d7330c..79ef240ddd 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01040300.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Basic Fonts Specifies the settings for the basic fonts in your documents.

-You can also change the basic fonts for Asian and complex text layout languages if their support is enabled in Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +You can also change the basic fonts for Asian and complex text layout languages if their support is enabled in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. These settings define the basic fonts for the predefined templates. You can also modify or customize the default text templates.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp index 80c291b827..2df0f921c4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01050100.xhp @@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ Sets the snap lines in front of all objects.

- Set the grid color on Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance. + Set the grid color on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance.

\ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp index a7787f91f5..f11be76f15 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp @@ -86,8 +86,7 @@ Color -Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document. To see the grid line color that was saved with the document, go to Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME -- Appearance, under Scheme find the entry Spreadsheet - Grid lines and set the color to "Automatic". +Specifies a color for the grid lines in the current document. To see the grid line color that was saved with the document, go to %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance, under Scheme find the entry Spreadsheet - Grid lines and set the color to "Automatic". Page breaks Specifies whether to view the page breaks within a defined print area. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp index 6014d46add..b1e7c63ead 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060700.xhp @@ -47,8 +47,7 @@ Print Determines the printer settings for spreadsheets.

- -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print defines the settings for all spreadsheets. To define settings for the current document only, choose File - Print, then click the Options button. +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print defines the settings for all spreadsheets. To define settings for the current document only, choose File - Print, then click the Options button.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp index 0c89a75233..597a3a2ced 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01090000.xhp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ %PRODUCTNAME Math Options Defines the print format and print options for all new formula documents. These options apply when you print a formula directly from %PRODUCTNAME Math. - You can also call the dialog by clicking the Options button in the Print dialog. The settings you define in the Tools - Options dialog will be permanent settings, whereas the settings in the Print dialog are only valid for the current document. + You can also call the dialog by clicking the Options button in the Print dialog. The settings you define in the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options dialog will be permanent settings, whereas the settings in the Print dialog are only valid for the current document.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp index 53bc948858..bfa6543942 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ If you deny to participate, no data will be sent and recording of data stops immediately. - At any time, you can enable or disable the recording of user interaction data and the sending of these data. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Improvement Program. Click the Info icon to browse to a web page with more information. + At any time, you can enable or disable the recording of user interaction data and the sending of these data. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Improvement Program. Click the Info icon to browse to a web page with more information. Click Yes, I am willing to participate … to enable the automatic feedback. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp index 29519ff604..313ec12501 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/online_update.xhp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@

Check for updates automatically - Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates. %PRODUCTNAME will check once a day, week, or month, as soon as a working Internet connection is detected. If you connect to the Internet by a proxy server, set the proxy on Tools - Options - Internet - Proxy. + Mark to check for online updates periodically, then select the time interval how often %PRODUCTNAME will check for online updates. %PRODUCTNAME will check once a day, week, or month, as soon as a working Internet connection is detected. If you connect to the Internet by a proxy server, set the proxy on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Proxy. When an update is available, an icon in the menu bar displays some explaining text. Click the icon to proceed. If you disable the check, the icon is removed from the menu bar. Online Update is a module that can be selected or deselected to be installed. Choose the customized installation in the Setup of %PRODUCTNAME. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp index 9675a39e8b..ea8f58d71e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/03130000.xhp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@

You can specify settings for running a slide show in Slide Show - Slide Show Settings. -Specify whether a slide show starts with the current slide or with the first slide on Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. +Specify whether a slide show starts with the current slide or with the first slide on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. To start a slide show, do one of the following: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp index 5d9230ca60..558dc86ac3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/04/01020000.xhp @@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ -F11 +Command+TF11 Styles and Formatting diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp index 8758f6fe5b..3a6de769a6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/individual.xhp @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ To always start a slide show from the current slide: -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. In the Start presentation area, select the Always with current page check box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp index 7db7eb0a52..5ac202d6ac 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/printing.xhp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Default printer settings -To set the default printing options for $[officename] Impress, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print. +To set the default printing options for $[officename] Impress, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print. Setting printer options for the current presentation @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ Click Options, and then select the printer options. -These settings override the default printer options in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print for the current print job only. +These settings override the default printer options in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print for the current print job only. Choosing a print layout for handouts diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp index ba2375bcbb..a818076384 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/guide/show.xhp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Choose Slide Show - Slide Show to run the show. -If you want all shows to start from the current slide instead of the first slide, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General and click Always with current page. +If you want all shows to start from the current slide instead of the first slide, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General and click Always with current page. Click to advance to the next effect or to the next slide. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp index e94c9df3eb..61e3641644 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/smath/guide/text.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Examples:collected from several issues: i78812, i9167, i21484, i25573 An imported MathType formula contains the following string W rSup { size 8{*} } -If you have set up Math to convert imported MathType formulas (in Tools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office), you see the formula with a placeholder instead of the asterisk. +If you have set up Math to convert imported MathType formulas (in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - Microsoft Office), you see the formula with a placeholder instead of the asterisk. Change {*} to {} * {} as in the following formula: W rSup { size 8{} * {} } You can also use W^"*" to enter the character as direct text. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp index f8dec4568e..da1a02785a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/02150000.xhp @@ -60,7 +60,7 @@

...

-To change the format of a footnote or endnote anchor or text, select it, and then choose Format - Character. You can press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window and modify the footnote or endnote paragraph style. +To change the format of a footnote or endnote anchor or text, select it, and then choose Format - Character. You can press Command+TF11 to open the Styles and Formatting window and modify the footnote or endnote paragraph style. Type Select the type of note to insert, that is, footnote or endnote. A footnote is placed at the bottom of the current page, whereas an endnote is placed at the end of the document. Footnote diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp index d868f450ee..818cd6b14b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@

-To change the default field display to field names instead of the field contents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select the Field codes checkbox in the Display area. +To change the default field display to field names instead of the field contents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select the Field codes checkbox in the Display area. When you print a document with View - Field Names enabled, you are prompted to include the field names in the print out.

Insert - Fields. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp index 66da064bd8..6ac2d718bf 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090200.xhp @@ -163,7 +163,7 @@ The "equal" comparative operator must be represented by two equal signs (==) in a condition. For example, if you define a variable "x" with the value of 1, you can enter the condition as x==1. User Data - You can include user data when you define conditions. To change your user data, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - User data. User data must be entered in the form of strings. You can query the user data with "==" (EQ), "!=" (NEQ), or "!"(NOT). + You can include user data when you define conditions. To change your user data, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User data. User data must be entered in the form of strings. You can query the user data with "==" (EQ), "!=" (NEQ), or "!"(NOT). The following table lists user data variables and their meanings: @@ -357,7 +357,7 @@ or type the following NOT Addressbook.Addresses.Company If the COMPANY database field is empty, the condition is true and the paragraph is hidden. - To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, you can choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraphs check box. + To display hidden paragraphs on the screen, you can choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraphs check box. Examples of Conditions in Fields The following examples use the Conditional text field, although they can be applied to any fields that can be linked to a condition. The syntax used for conditions is also used for the Hidden text, Hidden paragraph, Any record or Next record fields. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp index 2415e5a5b1..e409380deb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04120211.xhp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ Enter a title for the selected index. Protected against manual changes - Prevents the contents of the index from being changed. Manual changes that you make to an index are lost when the index is refreshed. If you want the cursor to scroll through a protected area, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the Cursor in protected areas - Enabled check box. + Prevents the contents of the index from being changed. Manual changes that you make to an index are lost when the index is refreshed. If you want the cursor to scroll through a protected area, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the Cursor in protected areas - Enabled check box.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp index 41b0d556a2..04a1f77397 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ dedr: reviewed To insert a table into a table, click in a cell in the table and choose Table - Insert - Table. -$[officename] can automatically format numbers that you enter in a table cell, for example, dates and times. To activate this feature, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table and click the Number recognition check box in the Input in tables area. +$[officename] can automatically format numbers that you enter in a table cell, for example, dates and times. To activate this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table and click the Number recognition check box in the Input in tables area.

Name diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp index f12c72cc77..282b307e1a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@

- An inserted script is indicated by a small green rectangle. If you do not see the rectangle, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View, and select the Comments check box. To edit a script, double-click the green rectangle. + An inserted script is indicated by a small green rectangle. If you do not see the rectangle, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View, and select the Comments check box. To edit a script, double-click the green rectangle. If your document contains more than one script, the Edit Script dialog contains previous and next buttons to jump from script to script. Jump to Previous Script. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp index f8f245fcbf..a9570acea9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/04/01020000.xhp @@ -223,7 +223,7 @@ - F11 + Command+TF11 Styles and Formatting window on/off @@ -385,8 +385,7 @@ - Command -Ctrl+Y + Command+Shift+ZCtrl+Y Redo last action diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp index f92e4a12a3..8957400f75 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions.xhp @@ -76,7 +76,7 @@ You can edit caption text directly in the document. A caption is formatted with the paragraph style that matches the name of the caption category. For example, if you insert a "Table" caption, the "Table" paragraph style is applied to the caption text. - $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. + $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, frame, or table. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp index 3b983a9cd8..aade858aa8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/captions_numbers.xhp @@ -81,7 +81,7 @@ In the Caption dialog, click OK. - $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. + $[officename] can automatically add a caption when you insert an object, graphic, or table. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption.

AutoCaption dialog diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp index fc16d93155..225806906f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/delete_from_dict.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ - Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids. Select the user-defined dictionary that you want to edit in the User-defined diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp index d44a7e685e..6a81534314 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/even_odd_sdw.xhp @@ -101,7 +101,7 @@ If two even or two odd pages directly follow each other in your document, Writer will insert an empty page by default. You can suppress those automatically generated empty pages from printing and from exporting to PDF. - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. Remove the check mark from Print automatically inserted blank pages. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp index a1bcdfbadc..ec4889d656 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Fields are used for data that changes in a document, such as the current date or the total number of pages in a document. Viewing Fields Fields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose View - Field Names. - To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose View - Field Shadings. To permanently disable this feature, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, and clear the check box in front of Field shadings. + To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose View - Field Shadings. To permanently disable this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, and clear the check box in front of Field shadings. To change the color of field shadings, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, locate the Field shadings option, and then select a different color in the Color setting box. Field Properties diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp index fa128de2a8..f4908f33fb 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/finding.xhp @@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ More options The similarity search can find text that is almost the same as your search text. You can set the number of characters that are allowed to differ. Check the Similarity search option and optionally click the ... button to change the settings. (Setting all three numbers to 1 works fine for English text.) - When you have enabled Asian language support under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text. + When you have enabled Asian language support under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, the Find & Replace dialog offers options to search Asian text. The Navigator The Navigator is the main tool for finding and selecting objects. You can also use the Navigator to move and arrange chapters, providing an outline view to your document. Choose Edit - Navigator to open the Navigator window. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp index 5daa018085..6bc921fcd7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/footnote_usage.xhp @@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ To edit the text of a footnote or endnote, click in the note, or click the anchor for the note in the text. - To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose Modify. + To change the format of a footnote, click in the footnote, press Command+TF11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, right-click "Footnote" in the list, and then choose Modify. To jump from the footnote or endnote text to the note anchor in the text, press PageUp. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp index c2c1d59a0f..54e43ecb26 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/hyphen_prevent.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ If your text is automatically hyphenated and certain hyphenated words look ugly, or if you want specific words never to be hyphenated you can switch off hyphenation for those words: - Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Some words contain special characters that %PRODUCTNAME treats as a hyphen. If you do not want such words to be hyphenated, you can insert a special code that prevents hyphenation at the position where the special code is inserted. Proceed as follows: - Enable the special features of complex text layout (CTL) languages: Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages and check Enabled for complex text layout (CTL). Click OK. + Enable the special features of complex text layout (CTL) languages: Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages and check Enabled for complex text layout (CTL). Click OK. Position the cursor at the place where no hyphenation should occur. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp index 53d2801850..4ab90fee6a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indenting.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ mw made indents a two level entry, changed "paragraphs;" and copied "changing;indents" from writer guide "ruler.xhp" Indenting Paragraphs see i66307 -To change the measurement units, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. +To change the measurement units, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General, and then select a new measurement unit in the Settings area. You can change the indents for the current paragraph, or for all selected paragraphs, or for a Paragraph Style. You can also set indents using the ruler. To display the ruler, choose View - Ruler. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp index 69d33dbf55..a6c525230f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/indices_edit.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Place the cursor in the index or table of contents. - If you cannot place your cursor in the index or table of contents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select + If you cannot place your cursor in the index or table of contents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select Enable in the Cursor in protected areas section. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp index ed00103314..391d1dc0ee 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/numbering_lines.xhp @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ Select Show numbering. - Press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. + Press Command+TF11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, and then click the Paragraph Styles icon. Right-click the "Default" paragraph style and choose Modify. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp index 4d3e9ae9e5..5ba113a5e3 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/pagenumbers.xhp @@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ An automatic page break appears at the end of a page when the page style has a different "next style". - For example, the "First Page" page style has "Default" as the next style. To see this, you may press F11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Page Styles icon, right-click the First Page entry. Choose Modify from the context menu. On the Organizer tab, you can see the "next style". + For example, the "First Page" page style has "Default" as the next style. To see this, you may press Command+TF11Command+TF11 to open the Styles and Formatting window, click the Page Styles icon, right-click the First Page entry. Choose Modify from the context menu. On the Organizer tab, you can see the "next style". A manually inserted page break can be applied without or with a change of page styles. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp index 3eca2b98c1..13a54bdb43 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/protection.xhp @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Turning off protection - Place the cursor in the cell or select the cells. First, if necessary, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and mark Cursor in protected areas - Enable. Then right-click the cell to open the context menu, choose Cell - Unprotect. + Place the cursor in the cell or select the cells. First, if necessary, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and mark Cursor in protected areas - Enable. Then right-click the cell to open the context menu, choose Cell - Unprotect. Select the table in the Navigator, open the context menu and select Table - Unprotect. Use Shift+Ctrl+T to remove protection for the entire current table or all selected tables. @@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ Turning off protection - Place the cursor in the index. First of all, if necessary, under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids , mark Cursor in protected areas - Enable. + Place the cursor in the index. First of all, if necessary, under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids , mark Cursor in protected areas - Enable. From the context menu choose Edit Index/Table. On the Index/Table tab page, unmark Protected against manual changes. In the Navigator, select the index, then open the context menu in the Navigator and select Index - Read-only. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp index 4de6046db9..c0f0bd3973 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ $[officename] can check the spelling of words in more than one language, provided that you have installed dictionaries for the other languages. - Choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and ensure that the Check in all languages check box in the Options + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and ensure that the Check in all languages check box in the Options list is selected. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp index 6221aaf545..9def14ef90 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ Smart Tags Menu - Any text in a Writer document can be marked with a Smart Tag, by default a magenta colored underline. You can change the color in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance. + Any text in a Writer document can be marked with a Smart Tag, by default a magenta colored underline. You can change the color in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance. When you point to a Smart Tag, a tip help informs you to Ctrl-click to open the Smart Tags menu. If you don't use a mouse, position the cursor inside the marked text and open the context menu by Shift+F10. In the Smart Tags menu you see the available actions that are defined for this Smart Tag. Choose an option from the menu. The Smart Tags Options command opens the Smart Tags page of Tools - Autocorrect Options. To Enable and Disable Smart Tags diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp index 79076a622f..cc67176628 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/table_sizing.xhp @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ Alt+Shift, and then press the right arrow key. - You can specify the behavior for the arrow keys by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and selecting the options that you want in the Keyboard handling area. + You can specify the behavior for the arrow keys by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and selecting the options that you want in the Keyboard handling area. To Change the Width of a Cell Hold down Option+Command diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp index 389dd53ce1..fbcdbf6fee 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp @@ -55,7 +55,7 @@ When you insert or delete cells, rows or columns in a table, the Behavior of rows/columns options determine how the neighboring elements are affected. For example, you can only insert new rows and columns into a table with fixed row and column dimensions if space permits. Note that these properties are valid only for changes to the column width that are made using the keyboard. Using the mouse, you are free to make any column width changes.UFI: fixes bugtraq 4971582 To set the Behavior of rows/columns - options for tables in text documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, or use the Fixed, Fixed/Proportional, and Variable icons on the Table + options for tables in text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, or use the Fixed, Fixed/Proportional, and Variable icons on the Table Bar. There are three display modes for tables: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp index d0a1f89fa3..46c60dd2ca 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ oldref="24">Using the Direct Cursor The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page. - To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. + To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. On the Tools bar, click the Direct Cursor icon -- cgit From 79f9c59e8b67fe0e3d5e613004b1dfb5f2b15dac Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Mon, 19 Oct 2009 11:31:12 +0000 Subject: i86464 --- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp | 2 +- 3 files changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp index e8f1074c1b..a1efd7f019 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Formatting Mark - + /text/shared/01/formatting_mark.xhp diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp index 1b591b1114..083922ca93 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Start Center - + /text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp index 53bc948858..fd86238b8a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp @@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Improvement Program - + /text/shared/optionen/improvement.xhp -- cgit From 84da983f78544c6fd6aa08be43fbbd2a4777c09b Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Tue, 27 Oct 2009 12:30:37 +0000 Subject: vor bauen --- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp | 15 +++++----- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp | 6 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp | 3 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp | 6 +--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp | 9 ++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp | 6 +--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp | 18 ++++-------- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp | 3 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp | 6 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp | 16 ++++------- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp | 8 +++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp | 4 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp | 15 +++------- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp | 16 ++++------- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp | 32 +++++++++------------- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp | 6 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp | 23 +++++----------- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09050000.xhp | 17 ++---------- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp | 15 ++++------ .../source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp | 9 ++---- .../source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp | 4 +-- .../source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp | 13 ++------- .../source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp | 6 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp | 4 --- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp | 9 ++---- .../source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp | 7 ++--- .../text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp | 6 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp | 7 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp | 7 ++--- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_search.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp | 2 +- .../shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp | 6 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp | 7 ++--- .../source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp | 9 ++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp | 10 +++---- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp | 6 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp | 4 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01030500.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp | 5 ++-- .../text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp | 6 +--- .../source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp | 6 +--- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp | 4 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp | 8 ++---- helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp | 6 +--- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp | 6 +--- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp | 4 --- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp | 4 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp | 4 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp | 6 +--- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp | 6 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp | 6 +--- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp | 3 +- .../source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp | 4 +-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp | 24 ++++++++-------- .../source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp | 18 ++++-------- .../source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp | 8 +++--- .../source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp | 32 ++++++++-------------- .../text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp | 17 +++++------- 98 files changed, 218 insertions(+), 383 deletions(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp index 7962e49bf5..8db2537c1b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@

-You can also set the view of the column and row headers in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. +You can also set the view of the column and row headers in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp index 30bbd09e1c..23879e04be 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060101.xhp @@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ SearchCriteria is the cell range containing search criteria. If you write several criteria in one row they are connected by AND. If you write the criteria in different rows they are connected by OR. Empty cells in the search criteria range will be ignored. - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate to define how $[officename] Calc acts when searching for identical entries. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate to define how $[officename] Calc acts when searching for identical entries. See also the Wiki page about Conditional Counting and Summation.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp index 0774564c79..ea197a360e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp @@ -613,7 +613,7 @@ oldref="293">Syntax Returns Number with at most Count decimal places. Excess decimal places are simply removed, irrespective of sign. TRUNC(Number; 0) behaves as INT(Number) for positive numbers, but effectively rounds towards zero for negative numbers. -The visible decimal places of the result are specified in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. +The visible decimal places of the result are specified in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. Example diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp index ba70970927..68852f11b4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030100.xhp @@ -56,27 +56,26 @@ Sort by Select the column that you want to use as the primary sort key. Ascending -Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. The sorting rules are given by the locale. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. The sorting rules are given by the locale. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. Descending -Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. Then by Select the column that you want to use as the secondary sort key. Ascending -Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. Descending -Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. Then by Select the column that you want to use as the third sort key. Ascending -Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Sorts the selection from the lowest value to the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. Descending -Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Sorts the selection from the highest value to the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. Sort Ascending/Descending -Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value, or from the lowest to the highest value. Number fields are sorted by size and text fields by the order of the characters. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. - +Sorts the selection from the highest to the lowest value, or from the lowest to the highest value. Number fields are sorted by size and text fields by the order of the characters. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language settings - Languages. Icons on the Standard toolbar

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp index 58c4eecc8c..0d2ad0c9cb 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12030200.xhp @@ -86,7 +86,7 @@ YJ: checked again Click here and then select the custom sort order that you want. Custom sort order - Select the custom sort order that you want to apply. To define a custom sort order, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists . + Select the custom sort order that you want to apply. To define a custom sort order, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists . Language Language diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp index eb6adb83f7..9ce3f6e0d0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12050200.xhp @@ -63,10 +63,10 @@ Considers formatting attributes when sorting. Custom sort order -Uses a custom sorting order that you defined under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. +Uses a custom sorting order that you defined in the Options dialog box at %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Sort Lists. Ascending -Sorts beginning with the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Sorts beginning with the lowest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. Descending -Sorts beginning with the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. +Sorts beginning with the highest value. You can define the sort rules on Data - Sort - Options. You define the default on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp index 4dcf167040..14e2da8b2e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12090101.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@

Selection -You can only select databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME. To register a data source, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. +You can only select databases that are registered in %PRODUCTNAME. To register a data source, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. Database Select the database that contains the data source that you want to use. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp index a11288e033..6e56ae6ef5 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/cellreferences_url.xhp @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ oldref="15">Save your spreadsheet. When you open it again later, $[officename] Calc will update the linked cells following an inquiry. -Under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General you can choose to have the update, when opened, automatically carried out either always, upon request or never. The update can be started manually in the dialog under Edit - Links. +Under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General you can choose to have the update, when opened, automatically carried out either always, upon request or never. The update can be started manually in the dialog under Edit - Links.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp index 9fc1d70b89..f88d612664 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_files.xhp @@ -110,7 +110,7 @@

-Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View Export text files Import text files

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp index cc869dec44..4e776f2cfa 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/csv_formula.xhp @@ -94,7 +94,7 @@

- Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View Export text files Import text files

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp index 5c3a77bc8e..ff16d5406d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_enter.xhp @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@ You can also press the + or - key on the numerical keyboard to start a formula. NumLock must be "on". For example, press the following keys in succession: + 5 0 - 8 Enter You see the result 42 in the cell. The cell contains the formula =+50-8. -If you are editing a formula with references, the references and the associated cells will be highlighted with the same color. You can now resize the reference border using the mouse, and the reference in the formula displayed in the input line also changes. Show references in color can be deactivated under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. +If you are editing a formula with references, the references and the associated cells will be highlighted with the same color. You can now resize the reference border using the mouse, and the reference in the formula displayed in the input line also changes. Show references in color can be deactivated under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. If you would like to view the calculation of individual elements of a formula, select the respective elements and press F9. For example, in the formula =SUM(A1:B12)*SUM(C1:D12) select the section SUM(C1:D12) and press F9 to view the subtotal for this area. If an error occurs when creating the formula, an error message appears in the active cell. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp index d536fcee6d..ac87c5fb2b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/formula_value.xhp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ If you want to view the calculation results instead of the formula, do not mark the Formulas box.

-Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp index ae61dc49ec..8a141cf0a7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000001.xhp @@ -276,7 +276,7 @@

See also the following functions: - The search supports regular expressions. You can enter "all.*", for example to find the first location of "all" followed by any characters. If you want to search for a text that is also a regular expression, you must precede every character with a \ character. You can switch the automatic evaluation of regular expression on and off in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. + The search supports regular expressions. You can enter "all.*", for example to find the first location of "all" followed by any characters. If you want to search for a text that is also a regular expression, you must precede every character with a \ character. You can switch the automatic evaluation of regular expression on and off in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Calculate. If an error occurs, the function returns a logical or numerical value. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp index 0bc577bb47..63bd54a391 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000020.xhp @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ In UNIX, certain file formats cannot be recognized automatically. $[officename] normally recognizes the correct file type automatically on opening a file. There may be cases where you have to select the file type yourself in the Open dialog. For example, if you have a database table in text format that you want to open as a database table, you need to specify the file type "Text CSV" after selecting the file. Basic Macros in MS Office Documents -In Tools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties you can specify the settings for the VBA macro codes in MS Office documents. VBA macros are unable to run in $[officename]; they must first be converted and adapted. Often you only want to use $[officename] to change the visible content of a Word, Excel or PowerPoint file and then save the file again in Microsoft Office format without changing the macros they contain. You can set the behavior of $[officename] as desired: Either the VBA macros are saved in commented form as a subroutine of $[officename] and when the document is saved in MS Office format are written back correctly again, or you can select the Microsoft Office macros to be removed when loading. The last option is an effective protection against viruses within the Microsoft Office documents. +In %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties you can specify the settings for the VBA macro codes in MS Office documents. VBA macros are unable to run in $[officename]; they must first be converted and adapted. Often you only want to use $[officename] to change the visible content of a Word, Excel or PowerPoint file and then save the file again in Microsoft Office format without changing the macros they contain. You can set the behavior of $[officename] as desired: Either the VBA macros are saved in commented form as a subroutine of $[officename] and when the document is saved in MS Office format are written back correctly again, or you can select the Microsoft Office macros to be removed when loading. The last option is an effective protection against viruses within the Microsoft Office documents. Notes regarding external formats and file types Even if they are not installed, some filters can be selected in the Open and Save dialogs. If you select such a filter, a message will appear saying that you can still install the filter if you require. If you want to install additional filters or remove individual filters from the installation, close %PRODUCTNAME, start the Setup program and select the Modify option. Then you will see a dialog in which you can add or remove individual components of %PRODUCTNAME. Graphic filters can be found in "Optional Components". diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp index 672cc7e127..66e0a105e0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ In OpenOffice.org 3 and StarOffice 9, you can select to save your documents using ODF 1.2 (default) or ODF 1.0/1.1 (for backward compatibility). Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and select the ODF format version. If you want to exchange documents with users that still use OpenOffice.org 1 or StarOffice 7, save the document using the respectively named filter in the File type listbox. -If you want to define another file format as the default, choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General to find alternative file formats for each $[officename] document type. +If you want to define another file format as the default, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General to find alternative file formats for each $[officename] document type. XML file structure Documents in OpenDocument file format are stored as compressed zip archives that contain XML files. To view these XML files, you can open the OpenDocument file with an unzip program. The following files and directories are contained within the OpenDocument files: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp index d2b2be4611..ccb225cd3f 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000099.xhp @@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ -Allows you to activate the automatic Help Agent. You can also activate the Help Agent through Tools - Options - $[officename] - General - Help Agent.UFI: moved here from shared/main0108.xhp - the slot is used in customize dialog, so we need the Help-ID. +Allows you to activate the automatic Help Agent. You can also activate the Help Agent through $[officename] - General - Help Agent in the Options dialog box.UFI: moved here from shared/main0108.xhp - the slot is used in customize dialog, so we need the Help-ID. Enables the display of icon names at the mouse pointer and other Help contents. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp index aa485a6ceb..fd988fb6e1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000406.xhp @@ -169,8 +169,7 @@

Path selection button in various wizards - Click Edit button for a few entries under Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths - + Click Edit button for a few entries under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths

Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp index ea9b5c99c3..dfabc71f71 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010100.xhp @@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ Opens the selected template for editing. Open Opens the selected document or creates a document based on the selected template. -To add another folder to the template path, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, and then enter the path. +To add another folder to the template path, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths, and then enter the path.

File properties diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp index 301ab4365a..12ae69f4ed 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp @@ -58,11 +58,7 @@ Address Creates a label with your return address. Text that is currently in the Label text box is overwritten. -To change your return address, choose Tools - Options - - -%PRODUCTNAME -, and then click on the User Data tab. - +To change your return address, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME, and then click on the User Data tab. Database Select the database that you want to use as the data source for your label. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp index ecaa6f6d49..4cc9d6f99d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp @@ -67,11 +67,7 @@

-The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAME -Open dialog. To activate the %PRODUCTNAME -Open and Save dialogs, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME -- General, and then select the Use %PRODUCTNAME -dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. +The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAMEOpen dialog. To activate the %PRODUCTNAMEOpen and Save dialogs, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- General, and then select the Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. If the file that you want to open contains Styles, special rules apply. Up One Level @@ -141,8 +137,7 @@ in the Documents and Settings directory -all template folders as defined in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME -- Paths +all template folders as defined in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths When you use File - Template - Save to save a template, the template will be stored in your user template directory. When you open a document that is based on such a template, the document will be checked for a changed template as decribed below. The template is associated with the document, it may be called a "sticky template". diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp index c71ee41858..dcc3b987a6 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp @@ -53,11 +53,7 @@

-The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAME -Save as dialog. To activate the %PRODUCTNAME -Open and Save dialogs, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME -- General, and then select the Use %PRODUCTNAME -dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area.UFI: using system dialogs works in Windows and Gnome 2.6 +The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAMESave as dialog. To activate the %PRODUCTNAMEOpen and Save dialogs, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- General, and then select the Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. To save a document as a template, use the command File - Templates - Save. Up One Level

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp index f07a693f74..de0bafdee0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@

-The following sections describe the $[officename] Export dialog. To activate the $[officename] Open and Save dialogs, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - General, and then select the Use $[officename] dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. +The following sections describe the $[officename] Export dialog. To activate the $[officename] Open and Save dialogs, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General, and then select the Use $[officename] dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. Up One Level

Create New Directory diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp index 4dd423bc76..6c9c8823a5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Left and Right Selection List (Templates / Documents) Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below. -To change the default template path, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. +To change the default template path, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp index d5913556c9..3a35753e00 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01130000.xhp @@ -148,18 +148,12 @@ This is the reason for continuos failure of i83561 Options Changes the printer settings for the current document. -To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for text documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. - -To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for spreadsheet documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print. - -To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for presentation documents, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print. - -If you want, you can use the STAR_SPOOL_DIR environment variable to specify the directory where the Xprinter spoolfiles are saved. For example: - -setenv STAR_SPOOL_DIR /usr/local/tmp (in the csh/tcsh) or - -export STAR_SPOOL_DIR=/usr/local/tmp (in the sh/bash) - +To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print in the Options dialog box. +To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for spreadsheet documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Print in the Options dialog box. +To set the default %PRODUCTNAME printer options for presentation documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Print in the Options dialog box. +If you want, you can use the STAR_SPOOL_DIR environment variable to specify the directory where the Xprinter spoolfiles are saved. For example: +setenv STAR_SPOOL_DIR /usr/local/tmp (in the csh/tcsh) or +export STAR_SPOOL_DIR=/usr/local/tmp (in the sh/bash) You can also use the spadmin printer setup program to specify additional printer options. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp index a6cb2f44b9..c34c8243b9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01160200.xhp @@ -45,8 +45,7 @@ Document as E-mail -Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used. If the document is new and unsaved, the format specified in Tools - Options - Load/Save - General is used. - +Opens a new window in your default e-mail program with the current document as an attachment. The current file format is used. If the document is new and unsaved, the format specified in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General is used.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp index 7018963477..10deeae6e5 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230100.xhp @@ -54,11 +54,9 @@

-If you choose Record - Show, the lines containing changed text passages are indicated by a vertical line in the left page margin. You can set the properties of the vertical line and the other markup elements by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes. - +If you choose Record - Show, the lines containing changed text passages are indicated by a vertical line in the left page margin. You can set the properties of the vertical line and the other markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes in the Options dialog box. -You can set the properties of the markup elements by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes. - +You can set the properties of the markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes in the Options dialog box. The following changes are tracked when the record changes command is active: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp index 4af15f460a..6fc76ea157 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/02230200.xhp @@ -57,23 +57,17 @@

-You can change the display properties of the markup elements by choosingTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes. -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes. - -When you rest the mouse pointer over a change markup in the document, a Tip displays the author and the date and time that the change was made. If the Extended Tips are activated, the type of change and any attached comments are also displayed. - +You can change the display properties of the markup elements by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Changes in the Options dialog box.%PRODUCTNAME Calc - Changes in the Options dialog box. +When you rest the mouse pointer over a change markup in the document, a Tip displays the author and the date and time that the change was made. If the Extended Tips are activated, the type of change and any attached comments are also displayed. -Show changes in spreadsheet - -Shows or hides recorded changes. - +Show changes in spreadsheet +Shows or hides recorded changes.

-Show accepted changes - +Show accepted changes Shows or hides the changes that were accepted. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp index 8ca2f4b37c..e479c90178 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp @@ -90,10 +90,10 @@ -The text color is ignored when printing, if the Print black check box is selected in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. +The text color is ignored when printing, if the Print black check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print in the Options dialog box. -The text color is ignored on screen, if the Use automatic font color for screen display check box is selected in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility. +The text color is ignored on screen, if the Use automatic font color for screen display check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility. @@ -158,7 +158,7 @@ Overlines or removes overlining from the selected text. If the cursor is not in a word, the new text that you enter is overlined. Overlining - Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. + Select the overlining style that you want to apply. To apply the overlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. Overline color Select the color for the overlining. @@ -170,7 +170,7 @@ Underlining - Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. + Select the underlining style that you want to apply. To apply the underlining to words only, select the Individual Words box. If you apply underlining to a superscript text, the underlining is raised to the level of the superscript. If the superscript is contained in a word with normal text, the underlining is not raised.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp index 97105ab067..d1a6817000 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@ paragraphs; Asian typography typography; Asian MW changed "formats;" to "formatting;"Asian Typography -Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area. The Asian typography options are ignored in HTML documents. +Set the typographic options for cells or paragraphs in Asian language files. To enable Asian language support, choose Language Settings - Languages in the Options dialog box, and then select the Enabled box in the Asian language support area. The Asian typography options are ignored in HTML documents.

@@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Line change Set the options for line breaks in Asian language documents. Apply list of forbidden characters to the beginning and end of line -Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line. To edit the list of restricted characters, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout. +Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line. To edit the list of restricted characters, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout. Allow hanging punctuation Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp index cf965a771b..3c98bf74a1 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05210200.xhp @@ -49,7 +49,7 @@

-Tools - Options - $[officename] - Colors +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Colors

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp index b2ef7c3658..04c1e0b814 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/mediaplayer.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ The Media Player supports many different media formats. You can also insert media files from the Media Player into your document.UFI: add a list of keyboard shortcuts to /04/ file when available -On Linux or Solaris systems, the Media Player requires the Java Media Framework API (JMF). Download and install the JMF files from http://java.sun.com/javase/technologies/desktop/media/jmf/index.jsp and add the path to the installed jmf.jar to the class path in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Java. +On Linux or Solaris systems, the Media Player requires the Java Media Framework API (JMF). Download and install the JMF files from http://java.sun.com/javase/technologies/desktop/media/jmf/index.jsp and add the path to the installed jmf.jar to the class path in the Options dialog box in %PRODUCTNAME - Java. On Windows systems, the Media Player uses DirectShow, which should be installed on your system by default. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp index 85290b0b35..843e0c227c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update.xhp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Check for Updates UFI: changed name of page, see i76016Next time start download automatically -Mark to enable the automatic check for updates. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update to disable or enable this feature. +Mark to enable the automatic check for updates. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box to disable or enable this feature. Click to select a folder to download the files. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp index 8e15c1d231..8b8b20d3d7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/online_update_dialog.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ Under some operation systems, it may be required to manually go to the download folder, unzip the download file, and start the setup script. After installation of the update you can delete the download file to save space.Download -Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update.Install +Downloads and saves the update files to the desktop or a folder of your choice. Select the folder in %PRODUCTNAME - Online Update in the Options dialog box.Install Installs the downloaded update.Pause Pauses the download. Later click Resume to continue downloading.Resume Continues a paused download.Cancel diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp index 5d47d0c2a8..7226efe320 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp @@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the right. First page is left - Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Tools - Options - Language settings - Languages. + Select to generate a PDF file that shows pages side by side in a continuous column. For more than two pages, the first page is displayed on the left. You must enable support for complex text layout on Language settings - Languages in the Options dialog box. User Interface Window options diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp index 668de9a5f9..1c3a9227c7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/securitywarning.xhp @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ Security Warning When you open a document that contains an unsigned macro, or a signed macro from an unknown source, the Security Warning dialog opens. -Enable or disable the macros. Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security to set the options. +Enable or disable the macros. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - Security in the Options dialog box to set the options. View Signature Opens a dialog where you can view the signature. Always trust macros from this source diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp index be8b685c1a..6092487d5c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170000.xhp @@ -75,15 +75,13 @@ -

Icon - +

Icon Form Controls

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp index e22f0e1953..0830d78a5b 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/01170003.xhp @@ -35,17 +35,11 @@ Special Tips for Date Fields /text/shared/02/01170003.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - - date fields; propertiesSpecial Tips for Date Fields - When you enter a year using two digits, the corresponding four digit value is determined by a setting in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General. For example, if 1935 is set as the lower limiting value and you enter 34 as a date value, then the result is 2034 instead of 1934. - The pre-set limit value will be saved for each document. If you want to open a document in an older version of StarOffice, in which the limit of 1930 could not be changed, then you must also select the limit value 1930 in your current version of $[officename]. -

- +date fields; propertiesSpecial Tips for Date Fields +When you enter a year using two digits, the corresponding four digit value is determined by a setting in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General. For example, if 1935 is set as the lower limiting value and you enter 34 as a date value, then the result is 2034 instead of 1934. +The pre-set limit value will be saved for each document. If you want to open a document in an older version of StarOffice, in which the limit of 1930 could not be changed, then you must also select the limit value 1930 in your current version of $[officename]. +

+ diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp index dbc69fef91..77e48ebe1a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02020000.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,7 @@ * ************************************************************************ --> - - + Font Name @@ -41,23 +40,21 @@ -

fonts; specifying several - alternative fonts - characters; alternative fonts +alternative fonts +characters; alternative fonts - + Font Name - Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly. - - You can enter several fonts, separated by semicolons. $[officename] uses each named font in succession if the previous fonts are not available. -

- Any font changes apply to the selected text or word in which the cursor is positioned. If no text has been selected, the font applies to text typed afterwards. - The last five font names that have been selected are shown in the top part of the combo box, if you have marked the Font history field in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View. As soon as you close your document, the normal alphabetic numbering of the installed fonts will be recreated. -

+Allows you to select a font name from the list or enter a font name directly. +You can enter several fonts, separated by semicolons. $[officename] uses each named font in succession if the previous fonts are not available. +

+Any font changes apply to the selected text or word in which the cursor is positioned. If no text has been selected, the font applies to text typed afterwards. +The last five font names that have been selected are shown in the top part of the combo box, if you have marked the Font history field in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View. As soon as you close your document, the normal alphabetic numbering of the installed fonts will be recreated. +

@@ -70,12 +67,9 @@

- In $[officename] you see the available fonts only if a printer is installed as the default printer in your system. With the spadmin program you can define a printer as the default printer. -In order to install a printer as the default printer please refer to your operating system documentation. - You can see the name of the fonts formatted in their respective font if you mark the Preview in fonts lists field in Tools - Options - $[officename] - View. - + In $[officename] you see the available fonts only if a printer is installed as the default printer in your system. With the spadmin program you can define a printer as the default printer. In order to install a printer as the default printer please refer to your operating system documentation. +You can see the name of the fonts formatted in their respective font if you mark the Preview in fonts lists field in $[officename] - View in the Options dialog box. If you receive an error message that states that certain fonts have not been found, you can install them with $[officename] Setup in the Repair mode if it is a $[officename] font. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp index 9bd966ebbb..f1d582e7b0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02130000.xhp @@ -56,8 +56,7 @@ -

Icon - +

Icon Decrease Indent @@ -65,7 +64,6 @@

-If you click the Decrease Indent icon while holding down the Command Ctrl key, the indent for the selected paragraph is moved by the default tab stop that has been set under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. - +If you click the Decrease Indent icon while holding down the Command Ctrl key, the indent for the selected paragraph is moved by the default tab stop that has been set under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General in the Options dialog box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp index 6e58a86a2b..67949a1e71 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/02140000.xhp @@ -42,14 +42,13 @@

-paragraphs; increasing indents of - +paragraphs; increasing indents of Increase Indent Click the Increase Indent icon to increase the left indent of the current paragraph or cell content and set it to the next tab position.

- If several paragraphs are selected, the indentation of all selected paragraphs is increased. +If several paragraphs are selected, the indentation of all selected paragraphs is increased. The cell content refers to the current value under Format - Cell - Alignment.

@@ -57,23 +56,17 @@ -

Icon - +

Icon Increase Indent -

- Click the Increase Indent icon while holding down the Command -Ctrl key to move the indenting of the selected paragraph by the default tab distance set under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General. - - Example: - - The indents of two paragraphs are moved with the Increase Indent function to a standard tab distance of 2 cm: - + Click the Increase Indent icon while holding down the Command Ctrl key to move the indenting of the selected paragraph by the default tab distance set under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General in the Options dialog box. + Example: + The indents of two paragraphs are moved with the Increase Indent function to a standard tab distance of 2 cm: @@ -85,8 +78,7 @@ Indent increased - Indent increased by the amount with the Command key -Ctrl key + Indent increased by the amount with the Command keyCtrl key @@ -112,7 +104,6 @@

- diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09050000.xhp index 5db8b89a3c..eabf0ae826 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09050000.xhp @@ -1,6 +1,5 @@ - + ************************************************************************--> + Find /text/shared/02/09050000.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - -

Find - Click and choose one of the Internet search engines from the submenu. The search term is entered in the URL Name box. The list of search engines in the Find submenu is defined in Tools - Options - Internet - Search. +Click and choose one of the Internet search engines from the submenu. The search term is entered in the URL Name box. The list of search engines in the Find submenu is defined in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Search.

- - -

Icon @@ -60,11 +51,9 @@ Find -

List of search engines When you have selected a search engine, $[officename] transfers the search request to your standard web browser, which then establishes an Internet connection to the search engine and displays the result. See also URL Name. - diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp index 7e50fc04b7..90e2d4445b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/12000000.xhp @@ -39,25 +39,20 @@ Explorer On/Off /text/shared/02/12000000.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -

Explorer On/Off -Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer. The Explorer On/Off icon is visible on the Table Data bar. +Turns on and off the view of the data source explorer. The Explorer On/Off icon is visible on the Table Data bar.

Icon - +

Icon Explorer On/Off @@ -72,15 +67,15 @@ Establishing a connection - As soon as you select an individual table or query, a connection to the data source is established. Once the connection is opened, the name of the data source, the Queries or Tables entry, and the name of the query or table selected is shown in bold type.

-Closes the connection to the data source. See Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections. +Closes the connection to the data source. See %PRODUCTNAME Base - Connections in the Options dialog box. -To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name.. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled. +To rename an entry, call this command and enter the new name. You can also do this by selecting the entry and pressing F2. The database must support renaming, otherwise this command is not enabled. Opens the selected database file for editing.i66574 new command "Database Registrations" / but name in UI is "Registered databases" -Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. +Opens a dialog to add/edit/remove a database file from the list of registered databases. The same dialog opens by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases in the Options dialog box.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp index 70057ed3d4..9462bd50f3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01010400.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ YJ: checked Specifies your address information. Use user data for return address -Use the address data from Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - User data. +Use the address data from %PRODUCTNAME - User Data in the Options dialog box. New sender address Use the address data from the following text boxes. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp index 9aa087918d..f8b0328d05 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp @@ -37,15 +37,10 @@ Presentation Wizard /text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - wizards; presentations -presentations; wizards - +presentations; wizards @@ -56,7 +51,7 @@

-The Presentation Wizard starts automatically when you open a new presentation. You can deactivate this function if you choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General and deselect the Start with Wizard check box. +The Presentation Wizard starts automatically when you open a new presentation. You can deactivate this function if you choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General and deselect the Start with Wizard check box. Within each wizard page, you can undo, modify, or skip altogether the editing steps. If you decide to skip over one of the pages, the wizard uses the default settings.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp index 8880d6792d..80493d7ee0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050100.xhp @@ -71,13 +71,13 @@ dedr: fixed #i31165# Lists the available template categories for presentations. List of existing presentations (only available when you select the Open existing presentation option) -Lists the presentations that you created and saved to the Templates directory that is specified under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths. To edit the layout and formatting of a presentation with the wizard, select the presentation, and then click Next. +Lists the presentations that you created and saved to the Templates directory that is specified under %PRODUCTNAME - Paths in the Options dialog box. To edit the layout and formatting of a presentation with the wizard, select the presentation, and then click Next. Preview Specifies that templates appear in the preview window. Do not show this dialog again -Specifies that you only want the Wizard to start when you expressly request it with File - Wizard - Presentation. This field is only visible when you create a presentation by choosing File - New - Presentation. You can also specify whether to show the dialog with the Start with Wizard check box in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. +Specifies that you only want the Wizard to start when you expressly request it with File - Wizard - Presentation. This field is only visible when you create a presentation by choosing File - New - Presentation. You can also specify whether to show the dialog with the Start with Wizard check box in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. Continue here to Wizard Page 2. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp index 8386b205a7..5e3f3f15c2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp @@ -36,15 +36,8 @@ Accessibility in %PRODUCTNAME /text/shared/guide/accessibility.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - - - - accessibility; %PRODUCTNAME featuresAccessibility in %PRODUCTNAME The following accessibility features are part of %PRODUCTNAME: @@ -65,9 +58,9 @@ Please note that accessibility support relies on Sun Microsystems Java technology for communications with assistive technology tools. This means that the first program startup may take a few seconds longer, because the Java runtime environment has to be started as well.

- Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View - Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance - Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - View + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Appearance + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp index dabe745c9a..83ba42366f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/assistive.xhp @@ -98,9 +98,9 @@ When accessibility support in $[officename] is enabled, the Java Runtime Environment is loaded, and increases the startup time for $[officename].

-Tools - Options - $[officename] - View -Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance -Tools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - View +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Accessibility

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp index 386f9e6a8e..5611fbcb06 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/collab.xhp @@ -43,9 +43,6 @@ - - - sharing documents collaboration @@ -58,7 +55,6 @@ Opens the Share Document dialog where you can enable or disable collaborative sharing of the document. Share Document dialog - Share this spreadsheet with other users - Enable to share the current document with other users. Disable to use the document unshared. This will invalidate the not yet saved edits that other users applied in the time since you last opened or saved this document. Collaboration in Calc diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp index a539c61509..f467ae6683 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,12 @@ * ************************************************************************ --> - Languages Using Complex Text Layout /text/shared/guide/ctl.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe - CTL;complex text layout languages @@ -88,7 +83,7 @@

-Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages -Tools - Options - Language Settings - Complex Text Layout +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Complex Text Layout diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp index 313003ed0b..bad39860a7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/data_register.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,7 @@ ************************************************************************ --> - - + Registering and Deleting a Database @@ -54,7 +53,7 @@ To register an existing database file: -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. Click New and select the database file.i60224 @@ -63,7 +62,7 @@ To remove a registered database from %PRODUCTNAME -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Base - Databases. Select the database file and click Delete. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp index 21fca6ab59..94d7534eaf 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/digitalsign_receive.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ You must use the %PRODUCTNAME file dialogs to use WebDAV over HTTPS. - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. Ensure that Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs is enabled. Click OK to close the dialog. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. Ensure that Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs is enabled. Click OK to close the dialog box. Choose File - Open. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp index dc1ab1d09b..7c1a88a3c8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ To create a backup file every time you save a document -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. Mark Always create backup copy. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ To save recovery information automatically every n minutes -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. Mark Save AutoRecovery information every and select the time interval. @@ -92,7 +92,7 @@

Save As -Tools - Options - Load/Save - General +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General Error Report Tool diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp index 3a4fca1ed1..b197eae8b4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp @@ -63,8 +63,7 @@ -

This icon is for tips on how to use the program more effectively. - +

This icon is for tips on how to use the program more effectively. The document is saved under its path and name on the current local data medium or network drive or on the Internet, overwriting any file of the same name. @@ -72,7 +71,7 @@

Save As

-Tools - Options - Load/Save - General +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp index 021f2daa68..7f06963f46 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/email.xhp @@ -53,14 +53,13 @@ drawings; sending as e-mail presentations; sending as e-mail attachments in e-mails -mw changed "tables;..." to "spreadsheets;..."mw changed "text;" to "text documents;"Sending Documents as E-mail - + +Sending Documents as E-mail Working in $[officename], you can send the current document as an e-mail attachment. Choose File - Send - Document as E-mail. -$[officename] opens your default e-mail program. If you want to send the current document with another e-mail program, you can select the program to use with Tools - Options - Internet - E-mail. - +$[officename] opens your default e-mail program. If you want to send the current document with another e-mail program, you can select the program to use with Internet - E-mail in the Options dialog box. In your e-mail program, enter the recipient, subject and any text you want to add, then send the e-mail. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp index aae5cd1ff7..170e21f198 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ checked - yj You can configure $[officename] so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax: -Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. Select the fax driver from the Fax list box and click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp index 2a04b8347a..18cc181950 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_rel_abs.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ When you include hyperlinks, two factors must be taken into account: whether they are set as relative or absolute on saving, and whether or not the file is present. -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General and specify in the Save URLs relative to field if $[officename] creates relative or absolute hyperlinks. Relative linking is only possible when the document you are working on and the link destination are on the same drive. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and specify in the Save URLs relative to field if $[officename] creates relative or absolute hyperlinks. Relative linking is only possible when the document you are working on and the link destination are on the same drive. You should create the same directory structure on your hard disk as that which exists in the web space hosted by your Internet provider. Call the root directory for the homepage on your hard disk "homepage", for example. The start file is then "index.html", the full path being "C:\homepage\index.html" (assuming Windows operating system). The URL on your Internet provider's server might then be as follows: "http://www.myprovider.com/mypage/index.html". With relative addressing, you indicate the link relative to the location of the output document. For example, if you placed all the graphics for your homepage in a subfolder called "C:\homepage\images", you would need to give the following path to access the graphic "picture.gif": "images\picture.gif". This is the relative path, starting from the location of the file "index.html". On the provider's server, you would place the picture in the folder "mypage/images". When you transfer the document "index.html" to the provider's server through the File - Save As dialog, and if you have marked the option Copy local graphics to Internet under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - HTML Compatibility, $[officename] will automatically copy the graphic to the correct directory on the server. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_search.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_search.xhp index 7d8f67dbdd..2538f471d2 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_search.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_search.xhp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ checked - yj $[officename] opens your Web Browser, which calls the selected Internet search engine. After a short time you see the result of your search on screen. -Choose Tools - Options - Internet - Search to define the search options. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Search to define the search options.

Hyperlink Bar diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp index 2e5b906d50..1b248a2521 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/language_select.xhp @@ -179,7 +179,7 @@

- Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Languages Format - Character - Font \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp index f8ea0a0e1a..5dffce42d6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/measurement_units.xhp @@ -74,6 +74,6 @@

Entering measurement units directly -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp index c5ccc9a5e6..459ce22b38 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_import_export_limitations.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,7 @@ * ************************************************************************ --> - - + About Converting Microsoft Office Documents @@ -46,8 +45,7 @@ Microsoft Office;importing password protected files MW moved "Microsoft Office;" from shared/guide/protection.xhp -About Converting Microsoft Office Documents - +About Converting Microsoft Office Documents $[officename] can automatically open Microsoft Office 97/2000/XP documents. However, some layout features and formatting attributes in more complex Microsoft Office documents are handled differently in $[officename] or are unsupported. As a result, converted files require some degree of manual reformatting. The amount of reformatting that can be expected is proportional to the complexity of the structure and formatting of the source document. $[officename] cannot run Visual Basic Scripts, but can load them for you to analyze. The most recent versions of %PRODUCTNAME can load, but not save, the Microsoft Office Open XML document formats with the extensions docx, xlsx, and pptx. The same versions can also run some Excel Visual Basic scripts, if you enable this feature at %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties. The following lists provide a general overview of Microsoft Office features that may cause conversion challenges. These will not affect your ability to use or work with the content of the converted document. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp index 6e77f75d76..c6a123d802 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Saving Documents by Default in Microsoft Office Formats -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. In the Default file format area, first select a document type, then select the file type for saving. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ You may delete the VBA macros from the Microsoft Office file on loading or on saving. -Choose Tools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties to set the VBA macro handling of $[officename]. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties to set the VBA macro handling of $[officename].

@@ -141,8 +141,7 @@

- +

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp index d0316f3bdf..84f55832df 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/print_blackwhite.xhp @@ -125,6 +125,6 @@

Printing dialogs -Tools - Options dialog +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options dialog box diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp index 7e25049336..60b10e1a2e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp @@ -32,17 +32,13 @@ * ************************************************************************ --> - + Setting up Printer, Fax and Fonts Under UNIX Based Platforms /text/shared/guide/spadmin.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -

@@ -171,8 +167,7 @@ To delete the selected printer, click Remove. The default printer or a printer that has been created by the system administrator in a server installation cannot be removed using this dialog. -Selecting a Default Printer - +Selecting a Default Printer To make the printer selected from the Installed printers list box the default printer, double-click its name or click the Default button. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp index 8e588d8ff2..ed26fecff2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/tabs.xhp @@ -154,11 +154,11 @@ FPE: Deleted screenshot. Changing the Defaults -If you want to change the settings of your default tab stops, you will find further information under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - General -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - General -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General -Tools - Options - (module name) - General. +If you want to change the settings of your default tab stops, you will find further information under %PRODUCTNAME Writer - General +%PRODUCTNAME Calc - General +%PRODUCTNAME Draw - General +%PRODUCTNAME Impress - General +(module name) - General in the Options dialog box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp index 75ae5eaf17..45321c8ebf 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0108.xhp @@ -34,8 +34,7 @@ ************************************************************************ --> - - + Help @@ -58,8 +57,7 @@ -

icon - +

icon %PRODUCTNAME Help diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp index c700965d17..cec80f872b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0227.xhp @@ -213,9 +213,7 @@ Eliminate Points -Marks the current point or the selected points for deletion. This happens in the event that the point is located on a straight line. If you convert a curve or a polygon with the Convert to Curve icon into a straight line or you change a curve with the mouse so that a point lies on the straight line, it is removed. The angle from which the point reduction is to take place can be set by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid -can be set by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Grid -is 15° by default. +Marks the current point or the selected points for deletion. This happens in the event that the point is located on a straight line. If you convert a curve or a polygon with the Convert to Curve icon into a straight line or you change a curve with the mouse so that a point lies on the straight line, it is removed. The angle from which the point reduction is to take place can be set by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid in the Options dialog boxcan be set by choosing %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Grid in the Options dialog boxis 15° by default. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp index 2b85356a47..42287e0d84 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ The Java platform support needs to be activated under $[officename] to run Java applications. -Activate Java platform support by choosing Tools - Options - $[officename] - Java. +Activate Java platform support by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Java. Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- Java, and click the Class Path button. After you add the path information, restart %PRODUCTNAME. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp index 08b307cff1..4732b0c7ae 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01000000.xhp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Select an entry to edit.

- Note for Mac OS X users: The Help mentions the menu path Tools - Options at numerous places. Replace this path with %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences on your Mac OS X main menu. + Note for Mac OS X users: The Help mentions the menu path Tools - Options at numerous places. Replace this path with %PRODUCTNAME - Preferences on your Mac OS X main menu. Both menu entries open the Options dialog box.

%PRODUCTNAME

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp index 9837e84f6c..035559b5a9 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01010200.xhp @@ -167,7 +167,7 @@ Warn when not saving in ODF or default format - You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Tools - Options - Load/Save - General. + You can choose to get a warning message when you save a document in a format that is not OpenDocument or which you did not set as default format in Load/Save - General in the Options dialog box. You can choose which file format will be applied as the default when saving documents of various document types. If you always exchange your documents with other persons who use Microsoft Office, for example, you may specify here that %PRODUCTNAME only uses the Microsoft Office file formats as a default. Use 'English (USA)' locale for numbers When importing numbers from an HTML page, the decimal separator and the thousands separator characters differ according to the locale of the HTML page. The clipboard however contains no information about the locale. For example, the characters "1.000" copied from a German Web page most possibly mean "one thousand" because the period is the thousands separator in a German locale. If copied from an English Web page, the same characters stand for the number 1 as in "one dot zero zero zero". -If not checked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Tools - Options - Language Settings - Language of - Locale setting. If checked, numbers will be interpreted as 'English (USA)' locale. +If not checked, numbers will be interpreted according to the setting in Language Settings - Language of - Locale setting in the Options dialog box. If checked, numbers will be interpreted as 'English (USA)' locale. Import unknown HTML tags as fields diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp index f11be76f15..fa93fae156 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Specifies whether to show numbers with the value of 0. Comment indicator -Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - General. +Specifies that a small rectangle in the top right corner of the cell indicates that a comment exists. The comment will be shown only when you enable tips under %PRODUCTNAME - General in the Options dialog box. To display a comment permanently, select the Show comment command from the cell's context menu. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp index 29036fe5ed..8c3f710733 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp @@ -43,9 +43,8 @@ -Macro Security - -The Macro Security dialog appears when a document contains one or more macros. You can also call the dialog from the Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security page. +Macro Security +The Macro Security dialog appears when a document contains one or more macros. You can also call the dialog from the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security page.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp index 4114a97952..6db7362426 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp @@ -37,14 +37,10 @@ Server Authentication /text/shared/optionen/serverauthentication.xhp - -UFI: Server Authentication dialog from Writer Mail Merge settings -DEDR: Reviewed - Server Authentication -On the Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail tab page, click the Server Authentication button to specify the server security settings. +On the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail tab page, click the Server Authentication button to specify the server security settings. The outgoing mail server (SMTP) requires authentication Enables the authentication that is required to send e-mail by SMTP. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp index 6c2fac999d..8001c46d7d 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp @@ -37,14 +37,10 @@ Test Account Settings /text/shared/optionen/testaccount.xhp - -UFI: Test Account Settings dialog from Mail Merge E-Mail tab page -YJ: checked - Test Account Settings -When you enter settings on the Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail tab page, you can click the Test Settings button to test your settings. +When you enter settings on the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Mail Merge E-mail tab page, you can click the Test Settings button to test your settings. (Results list box) In the top list box you will see the results of the test session. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp index b1c62cfe92..d75ca2b623 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04030000.xhp @@ -57,8 +57,8 @@

You can drag a snap line from the rulers and drop them on the page. To delete a snap line, drag it back to the ruler. Draw or move an object near a snap point or snap line to snap it in place. -To set the snap range, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - Grid. +To set the snap range, choose %PRODUCTNAME Draw - Grid +%PRODUCTNAME Impress - Grid in the Options dialog box. Position Sets the position of a selected snap point or line relative to the top left corner of the page. You can also drag a snap point or snap line to a new position. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp index a3b0bb7d20..7d17ae864f 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp @@ -30,17 +30,13 @@ * for a copy of the LGPLv3 License. * ************************************************************************--> - + Author /text/simpress/01/04990600.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -

@@ -52,7 +48,7 @@ Author Inserts the first and last names listed in the $[officename] user data into the active slide.

-To edit the name, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. +To edit the name, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp index 9a23b6f41e..207f14ea13 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp @@ -37,10 +37,6 @@ Current Size /text/simpress/02/08020000.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -

@@ -49,6 +45,6 @@ Current Size Displays the X and Y position of the cursor and the size of the selected object.

-This Status bar field uses the same measurement units as the rulers. You can define the units by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. +This Status bar field uses the same measurement units as the rulers. You can define the units by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp index f87e6c1607..c26ac7b8df 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp @@ -37,17 +37,13 @@ Ruler /text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -

Ruler -Shows or hides the horizontal ruler, that you can use to adjust page margins, tab stops, indents, borders, table cells, and to arrange objects on the page. To show the vertical ruler, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select the Vertical ruler check box in the Ruler area. +Shows or hides the horizontal ruler, that you can use to adjust page margins, tab stops, indents, borders, table cells, and to arrange objects on the page. To show the vertical ruler, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select the Vertical ruler check box in the Ruler area.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp index 818cd6b14b..626a76d574 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp @@ -37,10 +37,6 @@ Fields /text/swriter/01/03090000.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp index 5c91b2e1b2..9cfa630f00 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp @@ -53,6 +53,6 @@

When you delete a paragraph mark, the paragraph that is merged takes on the formatting of the paragraph that the cursor is in. -To specify which nonprinting characters are displayed, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the options that you want in the Display of area. +To specify which nonprinting characters are displayed, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the options that you want in the Display of area. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp index 029f189312..113b60726c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@

-To enable this feature, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and ensure that the Hidden paragraphs check box in the Display of area is selected. +To enable this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and ensure that the Hidden paragraphs check box in the Display of area is selected. Use the field command "Hidden Paragraph" to assign a condition that must be met to hide a paragraph. If the condition is not met, the paragraph is displayed. When you hide a paragraph, footnotes and frames that are anchored to characters in the paragraph are also hidden. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp index 980f3fdf1a..f71392edc3 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04060000.xhp @@ -75,7 +75,7 @@

AutoCaption -Opens the Caption dialog. It has the same information as the dialog you get by menu Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption. +Opens the Caption dialog. It has the same information as the dialog you get by menu %PRODUCTNAME Writer - AutoCaption in the Options dialog box.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp index ad94508674..e72f90aa4c 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Sender - Inserts fields containing user data. You can change the user-data that is displayed by choosingTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + Inserts fields containing user data. You can change the user-data that is displayed by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Statistics - Inserts document statistics, such as page and word counts, as a field. To view the statistics of a document, choose File - Properties, and then click the Statistics tab. + Inserts document statistics, such as page and word counts, as a field. To view the statistics of a document, choose File - Properties, and then click the Statistics tab. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp index 5a0fbc53ff..34d8c19d98 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Hidden text -Inserts a text field that is hidden when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and clear the Fields: Hidden text check box. +Inserts a text field that is hidden when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and clear the Fields: Hidden text check box. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Hidden Paragraph -Hides a paragraph when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraph check box. +Hides a paragraph when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraph check box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp index 25bd7255e4..93a94d39e8 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ You can resize and move selected frames and objects with the keyboard. To move a selected frame or object, press an arrow key. To move by one pixel, hold down OptionAlt, and then press an arrow key. To resize a selected frame or object, first press Ctrl+Tab. Now one of the handles blinks to show that it is selected. To select another handle, press Ctrl+Tab again. Press an arrow key to resize the object by one grid unit. To resize by one pixel, hold down OptionAlt, and then press an arrow key. -The increment by which you move an object with the keyboard is determined by the document grid. To change the properties of the document grid, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid. +The increment by which you move an object with the keyboard is determined by the document grid. To change the properties of the document grid, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp index 04a1f77397..a6124cf2f0 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04150000.xhp @@ -107,6 +107,6 @@ dedr: reviewed

Table - Table Properties - Text Flow -Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table +%PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp index bf75bf9aaa..15c0aa7e57 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp @@ -39,17 +39,13 @@ Text Grid /text/swriter/01/05040800.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -

text grid for Asian layout Text Grid -Adds a text grid to the current page style. This option is only available if Asian language support is enabled under Tools - Options - Language Settings - Languages. +Adds a text grid to the current page style. This option is only available if Asian language support is enabled under Language Settings - Languages in the Options dialog box.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp index dbf511c3ae..de7d8baee7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ To delete a row, place the cursor in the row that you want to delete, hold down OptionAlt and press Delete, release, and then press the up or the down arrow. -To change the behavior of tables in a text document, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table. +To change the behavior of tables in a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table.

Table Bar diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp index 47259a6a3d..7d22f0ed47 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp @@ -67,13 +67,13 @@ To reject the suggestion, click Remove. -To exclude paragraphs from the automatic hyphenation, select the paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, click the Text Flow tab, and then clear the Automatically check box in the Hyphenation area. -To turn off the suggestion dialogs for hyphenation, choose Tools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and select the Hyphenate without inquiry check box. +To exclude paragraphs from the automatic hyphenation, select the paragraphs, choose Format - Paragraph, click the Text Flow tab, and then clear the Automatically check box in the Hyphenation area. +To turn off the suggestion dialogs for hyphenation, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and select the Hyphenate without inquiry check box. To manually enter a hyphen, click in the word where you want to add the hyphen, and then press Command Ctrl+Minus sign (-). To insert a non-breaking (protected) hyphen, click in the word that you want to hyphenate, and then press Shift+Command +Ctrl +Minus sign(-). -To hide custom hyphens, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then clear the Custom hyphens check box. +To hide custom hyphens, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then clear the Custom hyphens check box. Word Word diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp index 12050ea71a..fd60b0e15d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Author -Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field. The field applies the entry made under Tools - Options - $[officename] - User data. +Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field. The field applies the entry made under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User data.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp index 6d68f0777f..eaef344c3a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp @@ -36,10 +36,6 @@ Direct Cursor On/Off /text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp - -Sun Microsystems, Inc. -converted from old format - fpe -

@@ -48,7 +44,7 @@ Direct Cursor On/Off -Activates or deactivates the direct cursor. You can specify the behavior of the direct cursor by choosing Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. +Activates or deactivates the direct cursor. You can specify the behavior of the direct cursor by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp index ec4889d656..d1e7f9ee3d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/fields.xhp @@ -55,8 +55,7 @@ Viewing FieldsFields consist of a field name and the field content. To switch the field display between the field name or the field content, choose View - Field Names.To display or hide field highlighting in a document, choose View - Field Shadings. To permanently disable this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, and clear the check box in front of Field shadings. - To change the color of field shadings, choose Tools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, locate the Field shadings option, and then select a different color in the Color setting - box. + To change the color of field shadings, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Appearance, locate the Field shadings option, and then select a different color in the Color setting box.Field PropertiesMost field types in a document, including database fields, store and display variable values.The following field types execute an action when you click the field: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp index 6086d36072..769e1c20a6 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/number_date_conv.xhp @@ -58,11 +58,11 @@ - Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and select or clear the Number recognition + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, and select or clear the Number recognition check box.

- Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table + %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp index e607ffbe44..8e2e503f53 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/ruler.xhp @@ -42,23 +42,21 @@ rulers;using rulers - horizontal rulers - vertical rulers - indents; setting on rulers - page margins on rulers - table cells;adjusting the width on rulers - showing;rulers - hiding;rulers - adjusting page margins and cell widths +horizontal rulers +vertical rulers +indents; setting on rulers +page margins on rulers +table cells;adjusting the width on rulers +showing;rulers +hiding;rulers +adjusting page margins and cell widths mw made "indent settings..." a two level entry and cut "changing;indents"Using Rulers - To show or hide rulers, choose View - Ruler. To show the vertical ruler, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select Vertical ruler in the Ruler area. - Adjusting Page Margins + To show or hide rulers, choose View - Ruler. To show the vertical ruler, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select Vertical ruler in the Ruler area. + Adjusting Page MarginsThe margins of a page are indicated by the filled areas at the ends of the rulers. - Changing Indents + Changing IndentsIndents are adjusted with the three small triangles on the horizontal ruler. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp index c0f0bd3973..7c2f68521b 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/select_language.xhp @@ -42,27 +42,21 @@ languages; recognition of - recognition;languages - spellcheck;activating for all languages - checking spelling;all languages +recognition;languages +spellcheck;activating for all languages +checking spelling;all languages MW made a two level entry of "regognition of languages" -Checking Spelling in Other Languages - +Checking Spelling in Other Languages $[officename] can check the spelling of words in more than one language, provided that you have installed dictionaries for the other languages. - Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and ensure that the Check in all languages check box in the Options - list is selected. + Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Writing Aids, and ensure that the Check in all languages check box in the Options list is selected. Activate the AutoSpellcheck icon in the Standard bar. - If you do not enable the Check in all languages - feature, words that do not occur in the default language of the document are underlined by a wavy red line. To assign the underlined word to another language, right-click the word, and then choose - Word is - or Paragraph is, where the suggested language and country is shown in the command. + If you do not enable the Check in all languages feature, words that do not occur in the default language of the document are underlined by a wavy red line. To assign the underlined word to another language, right-click the word, and then choose Word is or Paragraph is, where the suggested language and country is shown in the command.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp index 9def14ef90..eb5f8eeee2 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/smarttags.xhp @@ -42,10 +42,10 @@ smart tags - AutoCorrect function; smart tags - options;smart tags - disabling;smart tags - installing;smart tags +AutoCorrect function; smart tags +options;smart tags +disabling;smart tags +installing;smart tags MW moved 2 index entries from shared/01/06040700.xhp, inverted "smart tags;options", made "smart tags;" a one level entry and added 2 entries Using Smart Tags diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp index fbcdbf6fee..defe74d7c9 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/tablemode.xhp @@ -32,8 +32,7 @@ * ************************************************************************ --> - - + Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard @@ -42,33 +41,26 @@ table mode selection - proportional distribution of tables - relative distribution of table cells - tables; adapting the width by keyboard - cells; adapting the width by keyboard - keyboard;modifying the behavior of rows/columns - behavior of rows/columns +proportional distribution of tables +relative distribution of table cells +tables; adapting the width by keyboard +cells; adapting the width by keyboard +keyboard;modifying the behavior of rows/columns +behavior of rows/columns -Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard - +Modifying Rows and Columns by Keyboard When you insert or delete cells, rows or columns in a table, the Behavior of rows/columns options determine how the neighboring elements are affected. For example, you can only insert new rows and columns into a table with fixed row and column dimensions if space permits. Note that these properties are valid only for changes to the column width that are made using the keyboard. Using the mouse, you are free to make any column width changes.UFI: fixes bugtraq 4971582 - To set the Behavior of rows/columns - options for tables in text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, or use the Fixed, Fixed/Proportional, and Variable icons on the Table - Bar. There are three display modes for tables: + To set the Behavior of rows/columns options for tables in text documents, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table, or use the Fixed, Fixed/Proportional, and Variable icons on the Table Bar. There are three display modes for tables: - -Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. + Fixed - changes only affect the adjacent cell, and not the entire table. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cell becomes narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. - -Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. + Fixed, proportional - changes affect the entire table, and wide cells shrink more than narrow cells. For example, when you widen a cell, the adjacent cells become proportionally narrower, but the width of the table remains constant. - -Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases. + Variable - changes affect the table size. For example, when you widen a cell, the width of the table increases.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp index 46c60dd2ca..841316728e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/guide/text_direct_cursor.xhp @@ -42,22 +42,19 @@ text; cursor - entering text with direct cursor - direct cursor; settings - writing with direct cursor - cursor;direct cursor - settings;direct cursor +entering text with direct cursor +direct cursor; settings +writing with direct cursor +cursor;direct cursor +settings;direct cursor -Using the Direct Cursor - +Using the Direct Cursor The direct cursor allows you to enter text anywhere on a page. To set the behavior of the direct cursor, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. On the Tools bar, click the Direct Cursor icon -

Icon - . +

Icon. Click in a free space in the text document. The mouse pointer changes to reflect the alignment that will be applied to the text that you type: -- cgit From 9bb2a72ebde1d8ed250038984ee75a0735f0e349 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Tue, 27 Oct 2009 12:35:15 +0000 Subject: ein bug --- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp index 975d7de478..7a65259b40 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/12080200.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ Show Details Shows the details of the grouped row or column that contains the cursor. To show the details of all of the grouped rows or columns, select the outlined table, and then choose this command. -To hide a selected group, choose Data -Outline –Hide Details. +To hide a selected group, choose Data -Outline – Hide Details.

-- cgit From 0b4452cf68df42e3350d648e4a1c4d834279d381 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Tue, 27 Oct 2009 12:47:45 +0000 Subject: emph bugs --- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp | 2 +- 2 files changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp index 12ae69f4ed..93578356d4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01010201.xhp @@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ Address Creates a label with your return address. Text that is currently in the Label text box is overwritten. -To change your return address, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME, and then click on the User Data tab. +To change your return address, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME, and then click on the User Data tab. Database Select the database that you want to use as the data source for your label. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp index b197eae8b4..a83ebde0d7 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_save.xhp @@ -71,7 +71,7 @@

When you save a new file for the first time, the Save As dialog opens, in which you can enter a name, folder and drive or volume for the file. To open this dialog, choose File - Save As. -You can set the automatic creation of a backup copy under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. +You can set the automatic creation of a backup copy under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. Automatic extension to the file name When saving a file, %PRODUCTNAME always appends an extension to the file name, except when the file name already has an extension that matches the file type. See the list of ODF extensions. Some examples for the automatic extensions are listed in the following table: -- cgit From cc146cca0e68f7400053b5e1efad9fe9abdd1c41 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Tue, 27 Oct 2009 12:53:58 +0000 Subject: bug --- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp | 4 ++-- 1 file changed, 2 insertions(+), 2 deletions(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp index 4cc9d6f99d..94b6de9755 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp @@ -67,7 +67,7 @@

-The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAMEOpen dialog. To activate the %PRODUCTNAMEOpen and Save dialogs, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- General, and then select the Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. +The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAMEOpen dialog box. To activate the %PRODUCTNAMEOpen and Save dialog boxes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- General, and then select the Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. If the file that you want to open contains Styles, special rules apply. Up One Level @@ -137,7 +137,7 @@ in the Documents and Settings directory -all template folders as defined in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths +all template folders as defined in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Paths When you use File - Template - Save to save a template, the template will be stored in your user template directory. When you open a document that is based on such a template, the document will be checked for a changed template as decribed below. The template is associated with the document, it may be called a "sticky template". -- cgit From 5dbf63dcf4821b940ec48363fdf722884bab0a04 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Tue, 27 Oct 2009 12:57:06 +0000 Subject: bug --- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp index dcc3b987a6..9967606f94 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070000.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@

-The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAMESave as dialog. To activate the %PRODUCTNAMEOpen and Save dialogs, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- General, and then select the Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. +The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAMESave as dialog. To activate the %PRODUCTNAMEOpen and Save dialog boxes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- General, and then select the Use %PRODUCTNAME dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. To save a document as a template, use the command File - Templates - Save. Up One Level

-- cgit From a148d0a8d5ba13d20e0954274536be4af9724031 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Tue, 27 Oct 2009 15:06:05 +0000 Subject: bug --- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp index de0bafdee0..8c85c30356 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01070001.xhp @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@

-The following sections describe the $[officename] Export dialog. To activate the $[officename] Open and Save dialogs, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General, and then select the Use $[officename] dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. +The following sections describe the $[officename] Export dialog box. To activate the $[officename] Open and Save dialog boxes, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - General, and then select the Use $[officename] dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. Up One Level

Create New Directory -- cgit From b6158ad6d60882f436a6089c261f49f3f81b0576 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Tue, 27 Oct 2009 15:12:25 +0000 Subject: bug --- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp | 2 +- 1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp index 6c9c8823a5..8728dff9d4 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01110100.xhp @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Left and Right Selection List (Templates / Documents) Displays the available template categories or opened $[officename] files. To change the contents of the list, select Templates or Documents in the box below. -To change the default template path, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. +To change the default template path, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Paths. Select Templates or Documents to change the contents that are displayed in the list above. -- cgit From 696542163651cf7d76b35f45675b1369b13f0cd9 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Tue, 27 Oct 2009 15:27:06 +0000 Subject: emph bugs --- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09050000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp | 4 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_search.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp | 4 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp | 4 ++-- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp | 2 +- 23 files changed, 26 insertions(+), 26 deletions(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp index 8db2537c1b..96895ac65d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03070000.xhp @@ -64,7 +64,7 @@

-You can also set the view of the column and row headers in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. +You can also set the view of the column and row headers in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc - View. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp index 66e0a105e0..cd8bfe28a0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/00/00000021.xhp @@ -237,7 +237,7 @@ In OpenOffice.org 3 and StarOffice 9, you can select to save your documents using ODF 1.2 (default) or ODF 1.0/1.1 (for backward compatibility). Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General and select the ODF format version. If you want to exchange documents with users that still use OpenOffice.org 1 or StarOffice 7, save the document using the respectively named filter in the File type listbox. -If you want to define another file format as the default, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General to find alternative file formats for each $[officename] document type. +If you want to define another file format as the default, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General to find alternative file formats for each $[officename] document type. XML file structure Documents in OpenDocument file format are stored as compressed zip archives that contain XML files. To view these XML files, you can open the OpenDocument file with an unzip program. The following files and directories are contained within the OpenDocument files: diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp index e479c90178..dd40e99528 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020200.xhp @@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ The text color is ignored when printing, if the Print black check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print in the Options dialog box. -The text color is ignored on screen, if the Use automatic font color for screen display check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility. +The text color is ignored on screen, if the Use automatic font color for screen display check box is selected in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Accessibility. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp index d1a6817000..450693896e 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/05020700.xhp @@ -57,7 +57,7 @@ Line change Set the options for line breaks in Asian language documents. Apply list of forbidden characters to the beginning and end of line -Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line. To edit the list of restricted characters, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout. +Prevents the characters in the list from starting or ending a line. The characters are relocated to either the previous or the next line. To edit the list of restricted characters, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Language Settings - Asian Layout. Allow hanging punctuation Prevents commas and periods from breaking the line. Instead, these characters are added to the end of the line, even in the page margin. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09050000.xhp index eabf0ae826..d3e8ceac88 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/02/09050000.xhp @@ -39,7 +39,7 @@

Find -Click and choose one of the Internet search engines from the submenu. The search term is entered in the URL Name box. The list of search engines in the Find submenu is defined in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Search. +Click and choose one of the Internet search engines from the submenu. The search term is entered in the URL Name box. The list of search engines in the Find submenu is defined in %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Search.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp index f8b0328d05..364bbd9abc 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/autopi/01050000.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@

-The Presentation Wizard starts automatically when you open a new presentation. You can deactivate this function if you choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General and deselect the Start with Wizard check box. +The Presentation Wizard starts automatically when you open a new presentation. You can deactivate this function if you choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Impress - General and deselect the Start with Wizard check box.Within each wizard page, you can undo, modify, or skip altogether the editing steps. If you decide to skip over one of the pages, the wizard uses the default settings.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp index 7c1a88a3c8..8735185071 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/doc_autosave.xhp @@ -62,7 +62,7 @@ To create a backup file every time you save a document -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. Mark Always create backup copy. @@ -80,7 +80,7 @@ To save recovery information automatically every n minutes -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. Mark Save AutoRecovery information every and select the time interval. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp index 170e21f198..cd256220bd 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/fax.xhp @@ -65,7 +65,7 @@ checked - yj You can configure $[officename] so that a single click on an icon automatically sends the current document as a fax: -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Print. Select the fax driver from the Fax list box and click OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_search.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_search.xhp index 2538f471d2..0b46bdda99 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_search.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/hyperlink_search.xhp @@ -66,7 +66,7 @@ checked - yj $[officename] opens your Web Browser, which calls the selected Internet search engine. After a short time you see the result of your search on screen. -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Search to define the search options. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Internet - Search to define the search options.

Hyperlink Bar diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp index c6a123d802..e257b3e6d4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp @@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ Saving Documents by Default in Microsoft Office Formats -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - General. In the Default file format area, first select a document type, then select the file type for saving. @@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ You may delete the VBA macros from the Microsoft Office file on loading or on saving. -Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties to set the VBA macro handling of $[officename]. +Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - Load/Save - VBA Properties to set the VBA macro handling of $[officename].

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp index 42287e0d84..c52c34d724 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/main0650.xhp @@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ The Java platform support needs to be activated under $[officename] to run Java applications. -Activate Java platform support by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Java. +Activate Java platform support by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - Java. Before you can use a JDBC driver, you need to add its class path. Choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME- Java, and click the Class Path button. After you add the path information, restart %PRODUCTNAME. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp index 8c3f710733..d8c00cfa79 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/optionen/macrosecurity.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Macro Security -The Macro Security dialog appears when a document contains one or more macros. You can also call the dialog from the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security page. +The Macro Security dialog appears when a document contains one or more macros. You can also call the dialog from the %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME - Security page.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp index c26ac7b8df..fee44c822d 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03050000.xhp @@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ Ruler -Shows or hides the horizontal ruler, that you can use to adjust page margins, tab stops, indents, borders, table cells, and to arrange objects on the page. To show the vertical ruler, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select the Vertical ruler check box in the Ruler area. +Shows or hides the horizontal ruler, that you can use to adjust page margins, tab stops, indents, borders, table cells, and to arrange objects on the page. To show the vertical ruler, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - View, and then select the Vertical ruler check box in the Ruler area.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp index 9cfa630f00..304d5bca8e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03100000.xhp @@ -53,6 +53,6 @@

When you delete a paragraph mark, the paragraph that is merged takes on the formatting of the paragraph that the cursor is in. -To specify which nonprinting characters are displayed, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the options that you want in the Display of area. +To specify which nonprinting characters are displayed, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then select the options that you want in the Display of area. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp index 113b60726c..4a07e9f1f1 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/03140000.xhp @@ -52,7 +52,7 @@

-To enable this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and ensure that the Hidden paragraphs check box in the Display of area is selected. +To enable this feature, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and ensure that the Hidden paragraphs check box in the Display of area is selected. Use the field command "Hidden Paragraph" to assign a condition that must be met to hide a paragraph. If the condition is not met, the paragraph is displayed. When you hide a paragraph, footnotes and frames that are anchored to characters in the paragraph are also hidden. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp index e72f90aa4c..4a979bcf45 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090001.xhp @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Sender - Inserts fields containing user data. You can change the user-data that is displayed by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. + Inserts fields containing user data. You can change the user-data that is displayed by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User Data. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp index 34d8c19d98..d873080207 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04090003.xhp @@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ Hidden text -Inserts a text field that is hidden when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and clear the Fields: Hidden text check box. +Inserts a text field that is hidden when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and clear the Fields: Hidden text check box. @@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ Hidden Paragraph -Hides a paragraph when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraph check box. +Hides a paragraph when the condition that you specify is met. To use this function, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids and clear the Fields: Hidden paragraph check box. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp index 93a94d39e8..1505a3c650 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04130100.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ You can resize and move selected frames and objects with the keyboard. To move a selected frame or object, press an arrow key. To move by one pixel, hold down OptionAlt, and then press an arrow key. To resize a selected frame or object, first press Ctrl+Tab. Now one of the handles blinks to show that it is selected. To select another handle, press Ctrl+Tab again. Press an arrow key to resize the object by one grid unit. To resize by one pixel, hold down OptionAlt, and then press an arrow key. -The increment by which you move an object with the keyboard is determined by the document grid. To change the properties of the document grid, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid. +The increment by which you move an object with the keyboard is determined by the document grid. To change the properties of the document grid, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Grid.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp index 282b307e1a..dd9057759a 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/04200000.xhp @@ -50,7 +50,7 @@

- An inserted script is indicated by a small green rectangle. If you do not see the rectangle, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View, and select the Comments check box. To edit a script, double-click the green rectangle. + An inserted script is indicated by a small green rectangle. If you do not see the rectangle, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer/Web - View, and select the Comments check box. To edit a script, double-click the green rectangle. If your document contains more than one script, the Edit Script dialog contains previous and next buttons to jump from script to script. Jump to Previous Script. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp index de7d8baee7..d09e8ad9b8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/05090201.xhp @@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ To delete a row, place the cursor in the row that you want to delete, hold down OptionAlt and press Delete, release, and then press the up or the down arrow. -To change the behavior of tables in a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table. +To change the behavior of tables in a text document, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Table.

Table Bar diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp index 7d22f0ed47..398ddbb768 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/01/06030000.xhp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ Ctrl+Minus sign (-). To insert a non-breaking (protected) hyphen, click in the word that you want to hyphenate, and then press Shift+Command +Ctrl +Minus sign(-). -To hide custom hyphens, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then clear the Custom hyphens check box. +To hide custom hyphens, choose %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids, and then clear the Custom hyphens check box. Word Word diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp index fd60b0e15d..f3c9ed9137 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18030700.xhp @@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ Author -Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field. The field applies the entry made under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User data. +Inserts the name of the person who created the document here as a field. The field applies the entry made under %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - $[officename] - User data.

diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp index eaef344c3a..df753e68f8 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/swriter/02/18130000.xhp @@ -44,7 +44,7 @@ Direct Cursor On/Off -Activates or deactivates the direct cursor. You can specify the behavior of the direct cursor by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids. +Activates or deactivates the direct cursor. You can specify the behavior of the direct cursor by choosing %PRODUCTNAME - PreferencesTools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Writer - Formatting Aids.

-- cgit From 31b049f371881607039c3010f7013af4f514f668 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Uwe Fischer Date: Tue, 27 Oct 2009 15:29:09 +0000 Subject: final --- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03080000.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp | 274 ++++++++++----------- helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp | 17 +- helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp | 4 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp | 253 ++++++++++--------- .../source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp | 6 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp | 2 +- helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/ms_user.xhp | 2 +- .../source/text/shared/guide/paintbrush.xhp | 233 +++++++++--------- .../source/text/shared/guide/startcenter.xhp | 18 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01010800.xhp | 11 +- .../source/text/shared/optionen/01060100.xhp | 2 +- 16 files changed, 442 insertions(+), 394 deletions(-) (limited to 'helpcontent2/source/text') diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp index e660b427bf..2591698803 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/02170000.xhp @@ -56,9 +56,9 @@ YJ: checked

-You cannot delete a sheet if changes to the document are being recorded, as in when Edit - Changes - Record is activated. +You cannot delete a sheet while Edit - Changes - Record is activated. Yes -Permanently deletes the active sheet. +Deletes the current sheet. No Cancels the dialog. No delete is performed. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03080000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03080000.xhp index 53bf5b1129..ad655a0b33 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03080000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/03080000.xhp @@ -51,13 +51,13 @@ Value Highlighting -Highlights numerical values in your sheet. +Displays cell contents in different colors, depending on type. To remove the highlighting, unmark the menu entry.

-Text cells are formatted in black, number cells in blue, and all other types of cells, such as formulas, logical values, and dates, are formatted in green. +Text cells are formatted in black, formulas in green, and number cells in blue, no matter how their display is formatted. If this function is active, colors that you define in the document will not be displayed. When you deactivate the function, the user-defined colors are displayed again. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp index dd0f670eec..2a6c06d755 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060103.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.10 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -62,17 +62,17 @@ oldref="361">Syntax AMORDEGRC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate; Basis) -Cost is the acquisition costs. + Cost is the acquisition costs. -DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. + DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. -FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. + FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. -Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. + Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. -Period is the settlement period to be considered. + Period is the settlement period to be considered. -Rate is the rate of depreciation. + Rate is the rate of depreciation.

@@ -87,17 +87,17 @@ oldref="371">Syntax AMORLINC(Cost; DatePurchased; FirstPeriod; Salvage; Period; Rate; Basis) -Cost means the acquisition costs. + Cost means the acquisition costs. -DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. + DatePurchased is the date of acquisition. -FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. + FirstPeriod is the end date of the first settlement period. -Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. + Salvage is the salvage value of the capital asset at the end of the depreciable life. -Period is the settlement period to be considered. + Period is the settlement period to be considered. -Rate is the rate of depreciation. + Rate is the rate of depreciation.

@@ -113,17 +113,17 @@ oldref="337">Syntax ACCRINT(Issue; FirstInterest; Settlement; Rate; Par; Frequency; Basis) -Issue is the issue date of the security. + Issue is the issue date of the security. -FirstInterest is the first interest date of the security. + FirstInterest is the first interest date of the security. -Settlement is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. + Settlement is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. -Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) + Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate) -Par is the par value of the security. + Par is the par value of the security. -Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4).

Example @@ -143,13 +143,13 @@ oldref="350">Syntax ACCRINTM(Issue; Settlement; Rate; Par; Basis) -Issue is the issue date of the security. + Issue is the issue date of the security. -Settlement is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. + Settlement is the date at which the interest accrued up until then is to be calculated. -Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate). + Rate is the annual nominal rate of interest (coupon interest rate). -Par is the par value of the security. + Par is the par value of the security.

Example @@ -169,13 +169,13 @@ oldref="392">Syntax RECEIVED("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Investment; Discount; Basis) -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). -Investment is the purchase sum. + Investment is the purchase sum. -Discount is the percentage discount on acquisition of the security. + Discount is the percentage discount on acquisition of the security.

Example @@ -197,23 +197,23 @@ Syntax PV(Rate; NPer; Pmt; FV; Type) -Rate defines the interest rate per period. + Rate defines the interest rate per period. -NPer is the total number of periods (payment period). + NPer is the total number of periods (payment period). -Pmt is the regular payment made per period. + Pmt is the regular payment made per period. -FV (optional) defines the future value remaining after the final installment has been made. + FV (optional) defines the future value remaining after the final installment has been made. -Type (optional) denotes due date for payments. Type = 1 means due at the beginning of a period and Type = 0 (default) means due at the end of the period. + Type (optional) denotes due date for payments. Type = 1 means due at the beginning of a period and Type = 0 (default) means due at the end of the period. - - + + Example What is the present value of an investment, if 500 currency units are paid out monthly and the annual interest rate is 8%? The payment period is 48 months and 20,000 currency units are to remain at the end of the payment period. -=PV(8%/12;48;500;20000) = -35,019.37 currency units. Under the named conditions, you must deposit 35,019.37 currency units today, if you want to receive 500 currency units per month for 48 months and have 20,000 currency units left over at the end. Cross-checking shows that 48 x 500 currency units + 20,000 currency units = 44,000 currency units. The difference between this amount and the 35,000 currency units deposited represents the interest paid. + =PV(8%/12;48;500;20000) = -35,019.37 currency units. Under the named conditions, you must deposit 35,019.37 currency units today, if you want to receive 500 currency units per month for 48 months and have 20,000 currency units left over at the end. Cross-checking shows that 48 x 500 currency units + 20,000 currency units = 44,000 currency units. The difference between this amount and the 35,000 currency units deposited represents the interest paid. If you enter references instead of these values into the formula, you can calculate any number of "If-then" scenarios. Please note: references to constants must be defined as absolute references. Examples of this type of application are found under the depreciation functions.

@@ -231,18 +231,18 @@ oldref="22">Syntax SYD(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period) -Cost is the initial cost of an asset. + Cost is the initial cost of an asset. -Salvage is the value of an asset after depreciation. + Salvage is the value of an asset after depreciation. -Life is the period fixing the time span over which an asset is depreciated. + Life is the period fixing the time span over which an asset is depreciated. -Period defines the period for which the depreciation is to be calculated. + Period defines the period for which the depreciation is to be calculated. Example A video system initially costing 50,000 currency units is to be depreciated annually for the next 5 years. The salvage value is to be 10,000 currency units. You want to calculate depreciation for the first year. -=SYD(50000;10000;5;1)=13,333.33 currency units. The depreciation amount for the first year is 13,333.33 currency units. + =SYD(50000;10000;5;1)=13,333.33 currency units. The depreciation amount for the first year is 13,333.33 currency units. To have an overview of depreciation rates per period, it is best to define a depreciation table. By entering the different depreciation formulas available in %PRODUCTNAME Calc next to each other, you can see which depreciation form is the most appropriate. Enter the table as follows:

@@ -250,28 +250,28 @@ -A - + A + -B - + B + -C - + C + -D - + D + -E - + E + @@ -280,28 +280,28 @@ -Initial Cost - + Initial Cost + -Salvage Value - + Salvage Value + -Useful Life - + Useful Life + -Time Period - + Time Period + -Deprec. SYD - + Deprec. SYD + @@ -310,28 +310,28 @@ -50,000 currency units - + 50,000 currency units + -10,000 currency units - + 10,000 currency units + -5 - + 5 + -1 - + 1 + -13,333.33 currency units - + 13,333.33 currency units + @@ -346,8 +346,8 @@ -2 - + 2 + @@ -367,13 +367,13 @@ -3 - + 3 + -8,000.00 currency units - + 8,000.00 currency units + @@ -388,13 +388,13 @@ -4 - + 4 + -5,333.33 currency units - + 5,333.33 currency units + @@ -409,13 +409,13 @@ -5 - + 5 + -2,666.67 currency units - + 2,666.67 currency units + @@ -430,13 +430,13 @@ -6 - + 6 + -0.00 currency units - + 0.00 currency units + @@ -451,8 +451,8 @@ -7 - + 7 + @@ -469,8 +469,8 @@ -8 - + 8 + @@ -487,8 +487,8 @@ -9 - + 9 + @@ -505,8 +505,8 @@ -10 - + 10 + @@ -532,8 +532,8 @@ ->0 - + >0 + @@ -541,26 +541,26 @@ -Total - + Total + -40,000.00 currency units - + 40,000.00 currency units +

The formula in E2 is as follows: -=SYD($A$2;$B$2;$C$2;D2) - + =SYD($A$2;$B$2;$C$2;D2) + This formula is duplicated in column E down to E11 (select E2, then drag down the lower right corner with the mouse). Cell E13 contains the formula used to check the total of the depreciation amounts. It uses the SUMIF function as the negative values in E8:E11 must not be considered. The condition >0 is contained in cell A13. The formula in E13 is as follows: -=SUMIF(E2:E11;A13) - + =SUMIF(E2:E11;A13) + Now view the depreciation for a 10 year period, or at a salvage value of 1 currency unit, or enter a different initial cost, and so on.

@@ -576,13 +576,13 @@ oldref="381">Syntax DISC("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Price; Redemption; Basis) -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). -Price is the price of the security per 100 currency units of par value. + Price is the price of the security per 100 currency units of par value. -Redemption is the redemption value of the security per 100 currency units of par value. + Redemption is the redemption value of the security per 100 currency units of par value.

Example @@ -604,15 +604,15 @@ oldref="404">Syntax DURATION_ADD("Settlement"; "Maturity"; Coupon; Yield; Frequency; Basis) -Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. + Settlement is the date of purchase of the security. -Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). + Maturity is the date on which the security matures (expires). -Coupon is the annual coupon interest rate (nominal rate of interest) + Coupon is the annual coupon interest rate (nominal rate of interest) -Yield is the annual yield of the security. + Yield is the annual yield of the security. -Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4). + Frequency is the number of interest payments per year (1, 2 or 4).

Example @@ -636,14 +636,14 @@ oldref="91">Syntax EFFECTIVE(Nom; P) -Nom is the nominal interest. + Nom is the nominal interest. -P is the number of interest payment periods per year. + P is the number of interest payment periods per year. Example If the annual nominal interest rate is 9.75% and four interest calculation periods are defined, what is the actual interest rate (effective rate)? -=EFFECTIVE(9.75%;4) = 10.11% The annual effective rate is therefore 10.11%. + =EFFECTIVE(9.75%;4) = 10.11% The annual effective rate is therefore 10.11%.

effective interest rates @@ -658,9 +658,9 @@ oldref="416">Syntax EFFECT_ADD(NominalRate; NPerY) -NominalRate is the annual nominal rate of interest. + NominalRate is the annual nominal rate of interest. -NPerY is the number of interest payments per year. + NPerY is the number of interest payments per year. Example What is the effective annual rate of interest for a 5.25% nominal rate and quarterly payment. @@ -682,15 +682,15 @@ oldref="102">Syntax DDB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period; Factor) -Cost fixes the initial cost of an asset. + Cost fixes the initial cost of an asset. -Salvage fixes the value of an asset at the end of its life. + Salvage fixes the value of an asset at the end of its life. Life is the number of periods (for example, years or months) defining how long the asset is to be used. Period states the period for which the value is to be calculated. -Factor (optional) is the factor by which depreciation decreases. If a value is not entered, the default is factor 2. + Factor (optional) is the factor by which depreciation decreases. If a value is not entered, the default is factor 2. Example A computer system with an initial cost of 75,000 currency units is to be depreciated monthly over 5 years. The value at the end of the depreciation is to be 1 currency unit. The factor is 2. @@ -712,20 +712,20 @@ oldref="116">Syntax DB(Cost; Salvage; Life; Period; Month) -Cost is the initial cost of an asset. + Cost is the initial cost of an asset. -Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. + Salvage is the value of an asset at the end of the depreciation. -Life defines the period over which an asset is depreciated. + Life defines the period over which an asset is depreciated. -Period is the length of each period. The length must be entered in the same date unit as the depreciation period. + Period is the length of each period. The length must be entered in the same date unit as the depreciation period. -Month (optional) denotes the number of months for the first year of depreciation. If an entry is not defined, 12 is used as the default. + Month (optional) denotes the number of months for the first year of depreciation. If an entry is not defined, 12 is used as the default. Example A computer system with an initial cost of 25,000 currency units is to be depreciated over a three year period. The salvage value is to be 1,000 currency units. One period is 30 days. -=DB(25000;1000;36;1;6) = 1,075.00 currency units + =DB(25000;1000;36;1;6) = 1,075.00 currency units The fixed-declining depreciation of the computer system is 1,075.00 currency units.

@@ -741,12 +741,12 @@ oldref="130">Syntax IRR(Values; Guess) -Values represents an array containing the values. + Values represents an array containing the values. -Guess (optional) is the estimated value. An iterative method is used to calculate the internal rate of return. If you can provide only few values, you should provide an initial guess to enable the iteration. + Guess (optional) is the estimated value. An iterative method is used to calculate the internal rate of return. If you can provide only few values, you should provide an initial guess to enable the iteration. Example - Under the assumption that cell contents are A1=-10000, A2=3500, A3=7600 and A4=1000, the formula =IRR(A1:A4) gives a result of 80.24%. + Under the assumption that cell contents are A1=-10000, A2=3500, A3=7600 and A4=1000, the formula =IRR(A1:A4) gives a result of 11,33%.

calculating; interests for unchanged amortization installments @@ -761,18 +761,18 @@ oldref="316">Syntax ISPMT(Rate; Period; TotalPeriods; Invest) -Rate sets the periodic interest rate. + Rate sets the periodic interest rate. -Period is the number of installments for calculation of interest. + Period is the number of installments for calculation of interest. -TotalPeriods is the total number of installment periods. + TotalPeriods is the total number of installment periods. -Invest is the amount of the investment. + Invest is the amount of the investment. Example For a credit amount of 120,000 currency units with a two-year term and monthly installments, at a yearly interest rate of 12% the level of interest after 1.5 years is required. -=ISPMT(1%;18;24;120000) = -300 currency units. The monthly interest after 1.5 years amounts to 300 currency units. + =ISPMT(1%;18;24;120000) = -300 currency units. The monthly interest after 1.5 years amounts to 300 currency units.

Financial Functions Part Two diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp index d8bcbea6f3..84ed7a721e 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/01/04060106.xhp @@ -592,7 +592,7 @@ oldref="284">Syntax COMBINA(Count1; Count2) Count1 is the number of items in the set. Count2 is the number of items to choose from the set. -COMBINA returns the number of unique ways to choose these items, where the order of choosing is irrelevant, and repetition of items is allowed. For example if there are 3 items A, B and C in a set, you can choose 2 items in 6 different ways, namely AB, BA, AC, CA, BC and CB. +COMBINA returns the number of unique ways to choose these items, where the order of choosing is irrelevant, and repetition of items is allowed. For example if there are 3 items A, B and C in a set, you can choose 2 items in 6 different ways, namely AA, AB, AC, BB, BC and CC. COMBINA implements the formula: (Count1+Count2-1)! / (Count2!(Count1-1)!)i88052 Example diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp index de02505124..1cd50455c4 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/rounding_numbers.xhp @@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ In the Category field, select Number. Under Options, change the number of Decimal places and exit the dialog with OK. -To permanently change this everywhere +To change this everywhere Choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp index b0eb375903..c0da5d8dba 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/scalc/guide/table_view.xhp @@ -53,7 +53,7 @@ Changing Table Views -To permanently hide column and line headers in a table: +To hide column and line headers in a table: Under the menu item Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME Calc, go to the View tab page. Unmark Column/row headers. Confirm with OK. diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp index 809a58c360..c401bde8b0 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0000.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ $[officename] lets you present data graphically in a chart, so that you can visually compare data series and view trends in the data. You can insert charts into spreadsheets, text documents, drawings, and presentations. - Chart Data Charts can be based on the following data: @@ -70,10 +70,10 @@ Creates a chart in the current document. To use a continuous range of cells as the data source for your chart, click inside the cell range, and then choose this command. Alternatively, select some cells and choose this command to create a chart of the selected cells. - To insert a chart + To insert a chart

- To edit a chart + To edit a chart Click a chart to edit the object properties: @@ -88,8 +88,9 @@ Double-click a chart element in chart edit mode: Double-click an axis to edit the scale, type, color, and more. - Double-click a data point, or a data series in the legend, to edit the graphical values of the data series. - With a data series selected, double-click a single data point to edit the properties of this data point (for example, a single bar in a bar chart). + Double-click a data point to select and edit the data series to which the data point belongs. + With a data series selected, click, then double-click a single data point to edit the properties of this data point (for example, a single bar in a bar chart). + Double-click the legend to select and edit the legend. Click, then double-click a symbol in the selected legend to edit the associated data series. Double-click any other chart element, or click the element and open the Format menu, to edit the properties. @@ -124,7 +125,7 @@ Formats the stock gain indicators. -Formats the data lables. +Formats the data labels. Formats the Y error bars. @@ -184,4 +185,4 @@

- + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp index c2a5ecdf08..01fa2c3699 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/schart/main0202.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ Chart Data Table Opens the Data Table dialog where you can edit the chart data. Horizontal Grid On/Off - The Horizontal Grid On/Off icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the X axis. Note: This only works if the Minor grid check boxes in Insert - Grids are cleared. + The Horizontal Grid On/Off icon on the Formatting bar toggles the visibility of the grid display for the Y axis. Legend On/Off To show or hide a legend, click Legend On/Off on the Formatting bar. Scale Text diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp index ecaa6f6d49..c77a3b8746 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp @@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ - - - + + - - - + + - -Open -/text/shared/01/01020000.xhp - - - + + Open + /text/shared/01/01020000.xhp + + + directories; creating new -folder creation -My Documents folder; opening -default directories -multiple documents; opening -opening; several files -selecting; several files -opening; files, with placeholders -regular expressions; opening files -files; opening with placeholders -placeholders;on opening files -documents; opening with templates -templates; opening documents with -documents; styles changed -styles; 'changed' message -mw replaced "wildcards" by "regular expressions" + folder creation + My Documents folder; opening + default directories + multiple documents; opening + opening; several files + selecting; several files + opening; files, with placeholders + placeholders;on opening files + documents; opening with templates + templates; opening documents with + documents; styles changed + styles; 'changed' message +mw replaced "wildcards" by "regular expressions"mw deleted "regular expressions;" and "files;" -Open -Opens or imports a file. + +Open + Opens or imports a file. -

+ The following sections describe the %PRODUCTNAME + Open dialog. To activate the %PRODUCTNAME + Open and Save dialogs, choose Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME + - General, and then select the Use %PRODUCTNAME + dialogs in the Open/Save dialogs area. + If the file that you want to open contains Styles, special rules apply. -Up One Level -Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories.UFI: it is still a long-click -

+ +Up One Level + Move up one directory in the directory hierarchy. Long-click to see the higher level directories.UFI: it is still a long-click +

-Create New Directory -Creates a new directory. -

+ +Create New Directory + Creates a new directory. +

-Default Directory -Displays the files in the default user directory. -

-Display area -Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in. To open a file, select the file, and then click Open. -To open more than one document at the same time, each in an own window, hold CommandCtrl while you click the files, and then click Open. - - -Click a column header to sort the files. Click again to reverse the sort order. - - -To delete a file, right-click the file, and then choose Delete. - - -To rename a file, right-click the file, and then choose Rename. - - -Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialog. -Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialog. -Click to delete all selected files. + +Default Directory + Displays the files in the default user directory. +

+ +Display area + Displays the files and directories in the directory that you are in. To open a file, select the file, and then click Open. + To open more than one document at the same time, each in an own window, hold Command +Ctrl while you click the files, and then click Open. + + + Click a column header to sort the files. Click again to reverse the sort order. + + + +To delete a file, right-click the file, and then choose Delete. + + + +To rename a file, right-click the file, and then choose Rename. + + + +Click to delete the file with the name shown in this dialog. + +Click to cancel deletion of the file with the name shown in this dialog. + +Click to delete all selected files. -File name -Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL that starts with the protocol name ftp, http, or https. -If you want, you can use wildcards in the File name box to filter the list of files that is displayed. - + +File name + Enter a file name or a path for the file. You can also enter a URL that starts with the protocol name ftp, http, or https. + If you want, you can use wildcards in the File name box to filter the list of files that is displayed. + For example, to list all of the text files in a directory, enter the asterisk wildcard with the text file extension (*.txt), and then click Open. Use the question mark (?) wildcard to represent any character, as in (??3*.txt), which only displays text files with a '3' as the third character in the file name. -

-Version -If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open. You can save and organize multiple versions of a document by choosing File - Versions. The versions of a document are opened in read-only mode. +

+ +Version + If there are multiple versions of the selected file, select the version that you want to open. You can save and organize multiple versions of a document by choosing File - Versions. The versions of a document are opened in read-only mode. -File type -Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) to display a list of all of the files in the directory. + +File type + Select the file type that you want to open, or select All Files (*) to display a list of all of the files in the directory. -Open -Opens the selected document(s). -Insert -If you opened the dialog by choosing Insert - File, the Open button is labeled Insert. Inserts the selected file into the current document at the cursor position. -Read-only -Opens the file in read-only mode. + +Open + Opens the selected document(s). + +Insert + If you opened the dialog by choosing Insert - File, the Open button is labeled Insert. Inserts the selected file into the current document at the cursor position. + +Read-only + Opens the file in read-only mode. -Play -Plays the selected sound file. Click again to stop playing the sound file. + +Play + Plays the selected sound file. Click again to stop playing the sound file.

-Opening Documents With Templates - -%PRODUCTNAME recognizes templates that are located in any directory from the following list: - - -the shared template directoryremoved path - - -the user template directory in the home directory + +Opening Documents With Templates + + %PRODUCTNAME recognizes templates that are located in any directory from the following list: + + + the shared template directoryremoved path + + + the user template directory in the home directory in the Documents and Settings directory - - -all template folders as defined in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME -- Paths - - -When you use File - Template - Save to save a template, the template will be stored in your user template directory. When you open a document that is based on such a template, the document will be checked for a changed template as decribed below. The template is associated with the document, it may be called a "sticky template". -When you use File - Save As and select a template filter to save a template at any other directory that is not in the list, then the documents based on that template will not be checked. -When you open a document that was created from a "sticky template" (as defined above), %PRODUCTNAME checks to see if the template has been modified since the document was last opened. If the template was changed a dialog is shown where you can select which styles to apply to the document. -To apply the new styles from the template to the document, click Yes. -To retain the styles that are currently used in the document, click No. -If a document was created using a template that cannot be found a dialog is shown that asks you how to proceed next time the document is opened. -To break the link between the document and the missing template, click No, otherwise %PRODUCTNAME will look for the template the next time you open the document. -

-Opening Documents -Import and Export Filters -

- - + + + all template folders as defined in Tools - Options - %PRODUCTNAME + - Paths + + + When you use File - Template - Save to save a template, the template will be stored in your user template directory. When you open a document that is based on such a template, the document will be checked for a changed template as decribed below. The template is associated with the document, it may be called a "sticky template". + When you use File - Save As and select a template filter to save a template at any other directory that is not in the list, then the documents based on that template will not be checked. + When you open a document that was created from a "sticky template" (as defined above), %PRODUCTNAME checks to see if the template has been modified since the document was last opened. If the template was changed a dialog is shown where you can select which styles to apply to the document. + To apply the new styles from the template to the document, click Yes. + To retain the styles that are currently used in the document, click No. + If a document was created using a template that cannot be found a dialog is shown that asks you how to proceed next time the document is opened. + To break the link between the document and the missing template, click No, otherwise %PRODUCTNAME will look for the template the next time you open the document. +

+ Opening Documents + Import and Export Filters +

+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp index 5d47d0c2a8..57f3616cde 100644 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/01/ref_pdf_export.xhp @@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ * OpenOffice.org - a multi-platform office productivity suite * * $RCSfile: soffice2xmlhelp.xsl,v $ - * $Revision: 1.8 $ + * $Revision: 1.12 $ * * This file is part of OpenOffice.org. * @@ -124,7 +124,9 @@ Submit format Select the format of submitting forms from within the PDF file. Select the format of the data that you will receive from the submitter: FDF (Forms Data Format), PDF, HTML, or XML. - This setting overrides the control's URL property that you set in the document. + This setting overrides the control's URL property that you set in the document.insert help id here +Allow duplicate field names + Allows to use the same field name for multiple fields in the generated PDF file. If disabled, field names will be exported using generated unique names. Export automatically inserted blank pages diff --git a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp index 32f416c834..5be396302c 100755 --- a/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp +++ b/helpcontent2/source/text/shared/guide/export_ms.xhp @@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Enter a name in the File name box and click Save. -If you want the file dialogs to offer another file format as default, select that format in Tools - Options - Load/Save - General in the Default file format area. +If you want the file dialogs to offer another file format as default, select that format in Tools - Options - Load/Save - General in the Default file format and ODF settings area.